areva kvfg r8559c

216
Types KVFG 122, 142 Voltage and Frequency Relays Service Manual R8559C

Upload: ljtreels

Post on 13-Apr-2015

473 views

Category:

Documents


84 download

DESCRIPTION

electrical

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142

Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

R8559C

Page 2: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 3: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

SAFETY SECTION

Page 4: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 5: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 3 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3 3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4

3.2 Labels 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4 5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7 6. EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS 7 7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7

7.1 Protective fuse rating 7

7.2 Protective Class 7

7.3 Installation Category 7

7.4 Environment 8

8. CE MARKING 8 9. RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA 9

Page 6: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 2/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE

Page 7: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 3/10

1. INTRODUCTION This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and also includes descriptions of equipment label markings.

Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA T&D is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced.

Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who

• are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;

• are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;

• are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;

• are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.

Page 8: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 4/10 Safety Section

3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.

3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal Note – This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

3.2 Labels

See "Safety Guide" (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections

Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.

The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the equipment.

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.

Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken.

If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.

Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.

The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.

Page 9: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 5/10

Protection Class I Equipment - Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective

conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.

- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.

The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.

All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.

Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: - Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); - CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; - Protective fuse rating; - Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where

applicable); - Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the

application.

Equipment Use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed.

UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.

Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.

Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it.

For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies.

For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.

Page 10: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 6/10 Safety Section

External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched.

Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons.

Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.

Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage.

Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards

Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.

Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs

It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment. CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

External test blocks and test plugs

Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

*Note – when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.

Fibre optic communication

Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

Cleaning

The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed.

Page 11: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 7/10

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Decommissioning:

The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.

Disposal:

It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.

6. EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Electrical adjustments

It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock.

Exposure of live parts

Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts, these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.

7. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

7.1 Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible.

DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may

produce lethal hazardous voltages. 7.2 Protective Class

IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001

Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

7.3 Installation Category

IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001

Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III):

Distribution level, fixed installation.

Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 500Ω, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits

Page 12: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 8/10 Safety Section

7.4 Environment

The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected).

Pollution Degree – Pollution Degree 2 Altitude – operation up to 2000 m IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001

Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

8. CE MARKING

Marking Compliance with all relevant European Community directives:

Product safety: Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 60255-5: 2001 IEC 60664-1: 2001

Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC.

The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity:

EN 50263 : 2000

Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.

Where applicable :

II (2) G

ATEX Potentially Explosive Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, for equipment.

The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, “Ex e”, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas.

CAUTION – Equipment with this marking is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere.

Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance.

Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R & TTE) directive 95/5/EC.

Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.

Page 13: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 9/10

9. RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA CSA - Canadian Standards Association

UL - Underwriters Laboratory of America

– UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements

– UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

– UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements

– UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

– Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements

Page 14: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 10/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE

Page 15: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Contents

SAFETY SECTION

THIS MUST BE READ BEFORE ANY WORK IS CARRIED OUT ON THE RELAY

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 2 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 3 RELAY DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 4 APPLICATION OF PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 5 MEASUREMENT AND RECORDS

CHAPTER 6 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

CHAPTER 7 TECHNICAL DATA

CHAPTER 8 COMMISSIONING

APPENDIX 1 LOGIC DIAGRAMS

APPENDIX 2 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

APPENDIX 3 COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Our policy is one of continuous product development and the right is reserved to supply equipmentwhich may vary from that described.

Page 16: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 17: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 1Introduction

Page 18: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 19: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 1

Contents

1. INTRODUCTION 12. USING THE MANUAL 13. AN INTRODUCTION TO KVFG RELAYS 24. MODELS AVAILABLE AND MAIN FEATURES 25. AVAILABILITY OF MAIN FEATURES 3

Page 20: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 21: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 1

Page 1 of 3

Section 1. INTRODUCTION

The KVFG relay provides comprehensive voltage protection for phase and earthfaults together with measurements, communications, control and recordingfacilities. In addition, the relay incorporates frequency elements. As part of theK Range of relays, the KVFG can be integrated into an overall protection andcontrol system by utilising its serial communications, thereby providing informationfor day to day management of power systems.

This manual details the menu, functions and logic for the KVFG relays.

Section 2. USING THE MANUAL

This manual provides a description of the KVFG relays. It is intended to guide theuser through application, installation, setting and commissioning of the relays.

The manual has the following format:

Chapter 1. Introduction

An introduction on how to use this manual and a generalintroduction to the relays covered by the manual.

Chapter 2. Handling and installation

Precautions to be taken when handling electronic equipment

Chapter 3. Relay description

A detailed description of features that are common to allKVFG relays.

Chapter 4. Application of protection functions

An introduction to the applications of the relays and specialfeatures provided.

Chapter 5. Measurements and records

How to customise the measurements and use the recording features.

Chapter 6. Serial communications

Hints on using the serial communication feature.

Chapter 7. Technical data

Comprehensive details on the ratings, setting ranges andspecifications etc.

Chapter 8. Commissioning

A guide to commissioning, problem solving and maintenance.

Appendix Appendices include relay logic diagrams, connection diagramsand commissioning test records.

Page 22: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 1

Page 2 of 3

Section 3. AN INTRODUCTION TO KVFG RELAYS

The KVFG protection relays brings numerical technology to the successful Midosrange of protection relays. Fully compatible with the existing designs and sharingthe same modular housing concept, the relays offer more comprehensive protectionfor demanding applications.

The KVFG relays provide voltage and frequency protection for power distributionsystems, industrial power systems and all other applications where voltage orfrequency protection is required. All voltage elements are selectable to operate foreither under or overvoltage conditions, and can be selected to only operate forthree phase conditions, or more normally for any one phase. Phase segregatedoutputs are available to provide comprehensive indications to the user.Neutral voltage displacement (residual overvoltage) protection is also providedand can either use a calculated or measured value (depending upon relay modeland application). All frequency elements are selectable to operate for either underor over frequency conditions.

Integral features in KVFG relays include negative phase sequence overvoltage,undervoltage blocking, load shedding capabilities and two alternative groups ofpredetermined settings. The relays also have integral serial communication facilitiesvia K-Bus.

Section 4. MODELS AVAILABLE AND MAIN FEATURES

Two versions of the KVFG are available:

KVFG 122 Two pole voltage/frequency relay

KVFG 142 Four pole voltage/frequency relay

The KVFG 122, due to its limited analogue inputs offers functionality which ishighly dependent upon its connection. Two operation modes are available, setaccording to system data function link SDA. With SDA = 1, the relay is intendedfor neutral voltage displacement applications, whereas with SDA = 0 the relay isintended for phase-phase voltage/frequency protection.

The KVFG 142 has four analogue input circuits and therefore offers a completerange of protection functions, only dependent upon the protection VT.

The following table lists the features that vary between the two models, with themode of operation for the KVFG 122 also being considered.

Page 23: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 1

Page 3 of 3

Section 5. AVAILABILITY OF MAIN FEATURES

Feature KVFG 122 KVFG142

SDA = 0 SDA = 1Protection

Undervoltage 1

Overvoltage 1

Neutral voltage displacement

Underfrequency 1

Overfrequency 1

Negative sequence overvoltage

Measurement

Frequency 1

Voltage (phase-phase) 1

Voltage (phase-neutral) 1

Residual voltage

Positive sequence voltage

Negative sequence voltage

CB operations

Programmable Inputs/Outputs

Logic inputs 3 3 8

Output relays 4 4 8

Note: indicates that a function is always available.

1 indicates that this function will only be available if the 'spare' input is connectedto a suitable voltage input.

Page 24: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 25: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 2Handling and Installation

Page 26: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 27: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 2

Contents

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 11.1 Receipt of relays 11.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 12. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 13. RELAY MOUNTING 24. UNPACKING 25. STORAGE 3

Page 28: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 29: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 2

Page 1 of 3

Section 1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

1.1 Receipt of relays

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require carefultreatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examinedimmediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage hasbeen sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractorand AREVA T&D should be promptly notified.

Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installationshould be returned to their protective polythene bags.

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal moduleshould not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside itscase, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electricalconnections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed inan electrically conducting antistatic bag.

There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is notunnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are pluggedtogether, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequentdismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touchingthe printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxidesemiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricitydischarged from the body.

Section 2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of severalthousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices whenhandling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not beimmediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge whenhoused in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawingmodules unnecessarily.

Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductordevices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the folowingprecautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for whichthe equipment has been designed and manufactured.

1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostaticpotential as the equipment by touching the case.

2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.Avoid touching the electronic componenets, printed circuit track or connectors.

3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both atthe same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

Page 30: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 2

Page 2 of 3

4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which isat the same potential as yourself.

5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.

If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of anequipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with aconductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between500kΩ – 10MΩ.If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case toprevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for makingmeasurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.

More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can befound in BS5783 and IEC 60147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailedinvestigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out ina special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IECdocuments.

Section 3. RELAY MOUNTING

Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.If loose relays are to be assembled into a scheme, then construction details can befound in Publication R7012. If an MMLG test block is to be included it should bepositioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modulesshould remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack.The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes are accessible without removalof the cover. For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is normallysupplied showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres. These dimensions will alsobe found in Publication R6559.

Section 4. UNPACKING

Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of theparts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilledpersons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust andexcessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays thathave been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they areexposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are beingcarried out at the same time as construction work.

Page 31: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 2

Page 3 of 3

Section 5. STORAGE

If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in aplace free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifierbags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of thede-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambientconditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, priorto replacing it in the carton.

Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way intothe relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnatedwith moisture and the de-humifier will lose its efficiency.

Storage temperature –25°C to +70°C.

Page 32: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 33: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 3Relay Description

Page 34: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 35: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Contents

1. RELAY DESCRIPTION 12. USER INTERFACE 22.1 Frontplate layout 22.2 LED indications 32.3 Keypad 32.4 Liquid crystal display 32.5 Flag display format 33. MENU SYSTEM 53.1 Default display 53.2 Accessing the menu 53.3 Menu contents 63.4 Menu columns 63.5 System data 73.6 Fault records 83.7 Measurements 1 83.8 Measurements 2 93.9 Neutral displacement 1 93.10 Under/overvoltage 1 103.11 Under/overfrequency 1 113.12 Negative sequence 1 123.13 Neutral displacement 2 133.14 Under/overvoltage 2 133.15 Under/overfrequency 2 153.16 Negative sequence 2 163.17 Logic 163.18 Input masks 173.19 Relay masks 183.20 Recorder 194 CHANGING TEXT AND SETTINGS 214.1 Quick guide to menu controls 214.2 To enter setting mode 224.3 To escape from the setting mode 224.4 To accept the new setting 224.5 Password protection 234.6 Entering passwords 234.7 Changing passwords 234.8 Restoration of password protection 244.9 Entering text 244.10 Changing function links 244.11 Changing setting values 244.12 Setting communication address 254.13 Setting input masks 254.14 Setting output masks 254.15 Resetting values and records 254.16 Resetting trip LED indication 264.17 Selecting default display 26

Page 36: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Contents

5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 275.1 Auxiliary supply 285.2 Logic control inputs 285.2 Analogue inputs 295.4 Output relays 295.5 Ouput relay minimum dwell time 305.6 Setting the relay with a PC or laptop 306. ALARM FLAGS 30

Page 37: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 1 of 30

Section 1. RELAY DESCRIPTION

The KVFG 122 and KVFG 142 relays use numerical techniques to deriveprotection and control functions. The KVFG 142 has four multiplexed analogueinputs whilst the KVFG 122 has two, each is sampled eight times per powerfrequency cycle. The Fourier derived power frequency component returns the rmsvalue of the measured quantity. To ensure optimum performance, frequencytracking is used. The channel that is tracked is chosen on a priority basis, Va, Vb,Vc. Frequency tracking is not employed on the residual voltage to ensure maximumharmonic rejection. In the absence of a signal to frequency track, the samplingfrequency defaults to the rated frequency of the power system.

The KVFG 142 has eight output relays and eight logic inputs, the KVFG 122 hasfour relay outputs and three logic inputs. Each output relay can be programmed torespond to any of the protection or control functions, logic inputs can be allocatedto initiate control functions. The logic inputs are filtered to ensure that induced accurrent in the external wiring to these inputs does not cause an incorrect response.Software links further enable the user to customise the product for their ownparticular applications. They select/interconnect the various protection and controlelements and replace the interconnections that were previously used between thecases of relays that provided discrete protection or control functions.

The relays are powered from either a dc or an ac auxiliary supply which istransformed by a wide ranging dc/dc converter within the relay. This provides theelectronic circuits with regulated and galvanically isolated supply rails.

The power supply also provides a regulated and isolated field voltage to energisethe logic inputs.

An interface on the front of the relay allows the user to navigate through the menuto access data, change settings and reset flags, etc. As an alternative the relayscan be connected to a computer via their serial communication ports and the menuaccessed on-line. This provides a more friendly and intuitive method of setting therelay, as it allows a whole column of data to be displayed at one time instead ofjust a single menu cell. Computer programs are also available that enable settingfiles to be generated off-line and these files can then be downloaded to the relayvia the serial port.

In addition to protection and control functions the relays can display all the valuesthat it measures and many additional ones that it calculates. They also store usefultime stamped data for post fault analysis in fault records, event records anddisturbance records. This data is available via a serial communication port foraccess locally and/or remotely with a computer. The fault records, event recordsand disturbance records can be extracted automatically via the serial port andvalues can be polled periodically to determine trends. Remote control actions canalso be made and to this end many K Range relays have been integrated intoSCADA systems.

K Range relays provide the user with the flexibility to customise the relay for theirparticular applications. They provide many additional features that would beexpensive to produce on an individual basis and, when the low installation costsare taken into account, it will be seen to provide an economic solution forprotection and control.

Page 38: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 2 of 30

Section 2. USER INTERFACE

The front plate of the relay provides a man machine interface providing the userwith a means of entering settings to the relay displaying measured values, faultrecords and alarms. The series 2 relays have additional graphics to assist the user.The area in which the fault flags are displayed is divided up to denote the areaassociated with each tripping function.

2.1 Frontplate layout

Figure 1. Frontplate layout

The frontplate of the relay carries a liquid crystal display (LCD) on which data suchas settings and measured values can be viewed. The data is accessed through amenu system. The four keys [F]; [+]; [–] and [0] are used to move around the menu,select the data to be accessed and enter settings. Three light emitting diodes (LEDs)indicate alarm, healthy and trip conditions.

A label at the top corner identifies the relay by both its model number and serialnumber. This information uniquely specifies the product and is required whenmaking any enquiry to the factory about a particular relay. In addition there is arating label in the bottom corner which gives details of the auxiliary voltage andreference voltage. Two handles, one at the top and one at the bottom of thefrontplate, will assist in removing the module from the case.

F + 0

Relay types

Liquidcrystaldisplay

LED indicators

Ratings

Model number

Serial number

Digit identifiers

Entry keys

Hz24/125V

Vn

KVFG142 KVFG142167342J

-

Vx110V 50/60

Flag identifiersSTAGE 2STAGE 1

STAGE 3

ALARMALARM TRIP

GROUP

CFREQUENCY

EF D

FAULT NoSETTING

3AB 89 67 5 4

Va/Vab

12 0

HEALTHY

F n _ 2 G 2 1 32 4 1 32 4

R T 1 2

1 2

Vb/Vbc V2

3 4 1 32 4 1 32 1 32

Vc/Vca Vo AUX

RESET

Page 39: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 3 of 30

2.2 LED indications

The three LEDs provide the following functions:

GREEN LED Indicates the relay is powered up and running.

YELLOW LED Indicates alarm conditions that have been detected by the relayduring its self checking routine. The alarm lamp flashes when thepassword is entered (password inhibition temporarily overridden).

RED LED Indicates a trip that has been issued by the relay. This may be aprotection trip or result from a remote trip command; this can bedetermined by viewing the trip flags.

2.3 Keypad

The four keys perform the following functions:

[F] function select/digit select key/next column

[+] put in setting mode/increment value/accept key/previous column

[–] put in setting mode/decrement value/reject key/next column

[0] reset/escape/change default display key

Note: Only the [F] and [0] keys are accessible when the relay cover is in place.

2.4 Liquid crystal display

The liquid crystal display has two lines each of sixteen characters. A back-light isactivated when any key on the frontplate is momentarily pressed and will remain lituntil ten minutes after the last key press. This enables the display to be read in allconditions of ambient lighting.

The numbers printed on the frontplate just below the display, identify the individualdigits that are displayed for some of the settings, ie. function links, relay masks etc.Additional text around the display is used to define the areas in which the variousparts of the fault information will be found.

2.5 Flag display format

Now that there are five full fault records the top four left-hand digits no longerdisplay “Fn”, “Fn-1”, . . . “Fn-4” to denote the last and previous fault flags.Instead they now display “Fn” to indicate latched fault flags and “Fnow” toindicate unlatched flags (when cell 0023 is selected from the System Data column).

The next two digits indicate the setting group that was in operation during the faultwhen “Fn” is displayed eg. “G1” indicates setting group 1 and “G2” indicatessetting group 2. When “Fnow” is displayed then the setting group is that which iscurrently active.

The majority of the rest of the display area is shared by six tripping functions andauxiliary timer information. The information relavant to each function is delimitedby vertical lines. There are up to four characters on the display associated witheach of these areas. Each is used to flag the operation of protection stagesallocated to each function.

Page 40: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 4 of 30

STAGE 2STAGE 1

STAGE 3

ALARMALARM TRIP

GROUP

CFREQUENCY

EF D

FAULT NoSETTING

3AB 89 67 5 4

Va/Vab

12 0

HEALTHY

F n _ 2 G 2 1 32 4 1 32 4

R T 1 2

1 2

Vb/Vbc V2

3 4 1 32 4 1 32 1 32

Vo/Vca AUXVo

Figure 2. Flag display format

As an example, consider the four character locations below the area marked|Va/Vab|. If a trip condition occurs involving phase A. Then one or morecharacters will be displayed. These characters can have one of four values, ‘1’,‘2’, ‘3’ or ‘4’. Each digit flags the protection stage that has operated. It should benoted that each stage is independent of each other eg., stage 4 is not required tohave a greater setting than stage 1.

Flag information is similarly provided for the other five tripping functions, Vb/Vbc,V2, Frequency, Vc/Vca and Vo. It should be noted that not all tripping functionsare allocated four stages, V2 and Vo has two and three, respectively.

Three auxiliary timers are available AUX1, AUX2 and AUX3. The operation of oneor more of the timers is denoted by the digits displayed in the three characterlocations above the area marked |AUX|.

The final area of the fault display is utilised to indicate the remote trip operation ofa circuit breaker. The characters ‘RT’ appear in the lower left most area of thedisplay when a remote trip has been generated.

Page 41: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 5 of 30

Section 3. MENU SYSTEM

Data within the relays is accessed via a menu table. The table is comprised of cellsarranged in rows and columns, like a spreadsheet. A cell may contain text valueslimits or functions. The first cell in a column, the column heading, contains textidentifying the data grouped under it in that column.

3.1 Default display

The selected default display will normally show on the LCD and a momentary pressof the function key [F] will change the display to the heading for the first column,SYSTEM DATA. Further momentary presses of the [F] key will step down thecolumn, row by row, so that data may be read. If at any time the [F] key is pressedand held for one second the cursor will be moved to the top of the next columnand the heading for that column will be displayed. Further momentary presses ofthe [F] key will then move down the new column, row by row.

Pressing the [F] and [0] keys together and holding for one second can be used tostep back up the menu column. A short press of the [0] key will switch on the backlight for the LCD without changing the display in any way. In this way the full menumay be scanned with just the [F] and [0] keys that are accessible with the relaycover in place, and reset actions can be effected.

Following a protection trip the red trip LED will be lit. The display will changeautomatically from the default display to that of the fault flags for the last fault.Whilst the fault flags are displayed the trip LED can be reset by holding down the[0] for at least one second. The trip LED will be reset and the display will change tothe default display that was last selected. The flag information will not be lost bythis action, it can still be accessed under FAULT RECORDS.

The display will not default to the flag information if the user interface is in use atthe time. The default display will return 15 minutes after the last key press, or it canbe selected more quickly by moving to any column heading and then pressing the[0] key for 1 second. The selected default display will appear unless there hasbeen a fault when the fault flags will be displayed. It is possible to step through theavailable default displays by momentary presses of the reset key [0].

3.2 Accessing the menu

The only settings which can be changed with the cover in place are those that canbe reset either to zero or some preset value. To change any other settings the covermust be removed from the relay to gain access to the [+] and [–] keys that are usedto increment or decrement a value. When a column heading is displayed the [–]key will change the display to the next column and the [+] key will change thedisplay to the previous column, giving a faster selection.

When a cell that can be changed is displayed the action of pressing either the [+]or [–] keys will put the relay in setting mode (indicated by a flashing cursor in thedisplay). To escape from the setting mode without making any change the [0] keyshould be depressed for one second. Section 4 gives instructions for changing thevarious types of settings.

Password protection is provided for the configuration settings of the relay becausean accidental change could seriously affect the ability of the relay to perform itsintended functions. Configuration settings include the selection of time curves,function links, VT ratios, opto-input and relay output allocation. Individualprotection settings are protected from change when the relay cover is in place.

Page 42: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 6 of 30

3.3 Menu contents

Related data and settings are grouped in separate columns of the menu.Each column has a text heading (in capital letters) that identifies the data containedin that column. Each cell may contain text, values, limits and/or a function.The cells are referenced by the column number/row number. For example 0201 iscolumn 02, row 01. When a cell is displayed the four characters at the top lefthand corner of the LCD indicate the column number and row number in the menutable.

The full menu is given in the following tables, but not all of the menu items listedwill be available in a particular relay. Certain settings will disappear from themenu when the user de-selects them; the alternative setting group is a typicalexample, if group 2 settings have not been enabled, ie. the system data link SD4 isset to ‘0’, then the menu columns NEUT DISP 2, UV/OV 2, UF/OF 2 and NEGSEQ 2 will not be visible. Additionally the KVFG 122 can be configured in one oftwo modes either as two phase to phase or neutral displacement plus phase-neutralor phase-phase measurement. In the first case no NEUT DISP cells will be visibleand in the later the NEG SEQ cells will not be visible.

3.4 Menu columns

Column Heading DescriptionNumber

00 SYSTEM DATA Settings and data for the system –

relay and serial communications

01 FLT RECORDS Fault records for the last five faults

02 MEASURE 1 Directly measured quantities (Va, Vb, Vc, Vo etc.)

03 MEASURE 2 Calculated quantities (V1, V2 etc.)

04 NEUT DISP 1 Neutral displacement protection settings – group 1

05 UV/OV 1 Under/overvoltage protection settings – group 1

06 UF/OF 1 Under/overfrequency protection settings – group 1

07 NEG SEQ 1 Negative sequence protection settings – group 1

08 NEUT DISP 2 Neutral displacement protection settings – group 2

09 UV/OV 2 Under/overvoltage protection settings – group 2

0A UF/OF 2 Under/overfrequency protection settings – group 2

0B NEG SEQ 2 Negative sequence protection settings – group 2

0C LOGIC Settings for miscellaneous functions used in the logic

0D INPUT MASKS User assigned allocation of logic input

0E RELAY MASKS User assigned allocation of output relays

0F RECORDER Settings for the disturbance recorder

The menu cells that are read only are marked [READ].

Cells that can be set are marked [SET].

Cells that can be reset are marked [RESET].

Cells that are password protected are marked [PWP].

Page 43: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 7 of 30

3.5 System data

Display Status Description

0000 SYSTEM DATA READ Column heading

0002 Password PWP Password that must be entered before certain settingsmay be changed

0003 SD Links PWP Function links that enable the user to activate optionsrequired

0 Rem ChgStg 1= enable remote setting changes

2 Rem CB Ctrl 1= enable remote control of circuit breaker

3 Rem ChgGrp 1= enable remote change of setting group

4 En Grp2 1= enable group 2 settings to be used and displayed

5 FlagReset 1= enable flags to be reset automatically

7 Log Evts 1= enable logic inputs and output relay status to bestored in event records

8 Aut Rec Rst 1= enable automatic reset for disturbance recorder

9 CBcloseRst 1= enable circuit breaker close pulse to be terminatedby a trip signal

A OP Mode KVFG 122 only0 = selects 3 phase measurement mode

1= selects Vo plus 1 phase to neutral or 1 phase tophase measurement mode

0004 Description PWP Product description – user programmable text

0005 Plant PWP Plant reference – user programmable text

0006 Model READ Model number that defines the product

0008 Serial No. READ Serial number – unique number identifying theparticular product

0009 Freq SET Default sampling frequency – must be set to powersystem frequency

000A Comms Level READ Indicates the Courier communications level supportedby the product

000B Rly Address SET Communication address (1 to 255)

000C Plnt Status READ Binary word used to indicate the status of circuitbreakers and isolators

000D Ctrl Status READ Binary word used to indicate the status of control data

000E Grp Now READ Indicates the active setting group

000F LS Stage READ Indicates the last received load shedding command

0010 CB Control SET Indicates the status of the circuit breaker control

0011 Software READ Software reference for the product

0020 Log Status READ Indicates the current status of all the logic inputs

0021 Rly Status READ Indicates the current status of all the output relay drives

Page 44: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 8 of 30

0022 Alarms READ Indicates the current state of internal alarms

0 Uncfg READ Error in factory configuration settings

1 Uncalib READ Operating in uncalibrated state

2 Setting READ Error detected in stored settings

3 No Service READ Protection out-of-service and not functioning

4 No Samples READ No A/D samples but still in service

5 No Fourier READ Fourier is not being performed

6 Test Wdog SET Test watchdog by setting this bit to “1”

7 CB ops READ CB reached set number of operations

0023 Fnow READ Indicates the current status of the fault flags (these flagsare not latched)

3.6 Fault records

Display Status Description

0100 FLT RECORDS READ Column heading

0101 Fault No 1 SET Number of fault record displayed – may be selected(Fn to Fn–4; Fn–4 is the oldest)

0102 Fn G1 READ Flags (latched) indicating the functions that operatedduring the fault

0103 Va READ Phase A voltage measured during the fault

0104 Vb READ Phase B voltage measured during the fault

0105 Vc READ Phase C voltage measured during the fault

0107 V2 READ Highest value of negative sequence voltage duringthe fault

0108 Freq READ Measured frequency during the fault

010A Vab READ Value of Vab during the fault

010B Vbc READ Value of Vbc during the fault

010C Vca READ Value of Vca during the fault

010D Vo READ Highest value of residual voltage measured duringthe fault

0110 Clear = 0 RESET Press [0] key to clear the fault records when this cell isdisplayed

3.7 Measurements 1

Display Status Description

0200 MEASURE 1 READ Column heading

0205 Vab READ Measured phase to phase voltage Vab

0206 Vbc READ Measured phase to phase voltage Vbc

0207 Vca READ Measured phase to phase voltage Vca

0208 Va READ Measured phase to neutral voltage Va

Page 45: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 9 of 30

0209 Vb READ Measured phase to neutral voltage Vb

020A Vc READ Measured phase to neutral voltage Vc

020B Vo READ Measured residual voltage Vo

020C F READ Measured frequency

3.8 Measurements 2

Display Status Description

0300 MEASURE 2 READ Column heading

0305 V1 READ Calculated positive sequence voltage V1

0306 V2 READ Calculated negative sequence voltage V2

0310 CB ops RESET Total number of CB operations

3.9 Neutral displacement 1

Display Status Description

0400 NEUT DISP 1 READ Column heading

0401 ND Links PWP Software links to select the optional neutral voltagedisplacement functions

0 1Vo 1= enable stage 1 neutral voltage displacement

1 2Vo 1= enable stage 2 neutral voltage displacement

2 3Vo 1= enable stage 3 neutral voltage displacement

3 Vo calc 1= enable Vo calculation and ignore Vo input(KVFG 142 only, unsettable otherwise)

0402 VT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the voltage transformer feeding therelay

0403 1Vo SET Voltage setting for stage 1 neutral voltage displacement

0404 1VoChar PWP Selected characteristic for stage 1 (definite time orinverse)

0405 1tVo SET Time delay to be used for stage 1

0406 1Vo (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 1

0407 2Vo SET Voltage setting for stage 2 neutral voltage displacement

0408 2VoChar PWP Selected characteristic for stage 2 (definite time orinverse)

0409 2tVo SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

040A 2Vo (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 2

040B 3Vo SET Voltage setting for stage 3 neutral voltage displacement

040C 3VoChar PWP Selected characteristic for stage 3 (definite time orinverse)

040D 3tVo SET Time delay to be used for stage 3

040E 3Vo (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 3

Page 46: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 10 of 30

3.10 Under/overvoltage 1

Display Status Description

0500 UV/OV 1 READ Column heading

0501 VF Links PWP Software links to select the optional under/overvoltagefunctions

0 1V Enable 1= enable stage 1 under/overvoltage protection

1 1V Under 1= stage 1 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 1 element used for overvoltage protection

2 1V all=1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 1 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 1setting

3 2V Enable 1= enable stage 2 under/overvoltage protection

4 2V Under 1= stage 2 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 2 element used for overvoltage protection

5 2V all = 1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 2 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 2setting

6 3V Enable 1= enable stage 3 under/overvoltage protection

7 3V Under 1= stage 3 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 3 element used for overvoltage protection

8 3V all=1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 3 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 3setting

9 4V Enable 1=enable stage 4 under/overvoltage protection

A 4V Under 1=stage 4 element used for undervoltage protection;

0=stage 4 element used for overvoltage protection

B 4V all = 1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 4 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 4setting

C Ph-N = 1 1= use phase to neutral voltages for protection

0 = use phase to phase voltages for protectionThis applies to KVFG 142 and KVFG 122 withSDA = 1

D UV Block 1= enable blocking of all undervoltage elements whenmeasured voltage is below 15V

0502 VT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the voltage transformer feeding therelay

0503 1V SET Voltage setting for stage 1 under/overvoltageprotection

0504 1V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 1 (definite time orinverse)

Page 47: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 11 of 30

0505 1tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 1

0506 1V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 1

0507 2V SET Voltage setting for stage 2 under/overvoltageprotection

0508 2V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 2 (definite time orinverse)

0509 2tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

050A 2V (tms) SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

050B 3V SET Voltage setting for stage 3 under/overvoltageprotection

050C 3V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 3 (definite time orinverse)

050D 3tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 3

050E 3V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 3

050F 4V SET Voltage setting for stage 4 under/overvoltageprotection

0510 4V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 4 (definite time orinverse)

0511 4tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 4

0512 4V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 4

3.11 Under/overfrequency 1

Display Status Description

0600 UF/OF 1 READ Column heading

0601 FF Links PWP Software links to select the optional under/overfrequency functions

0 1F Enable 1= enable stage 1 under/overfrequency protection

1 1F Under 1= stage 1 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 1 element used for overfrequencyprotection

2 2F Enable 1= enable stage 2 under/overfrequency protection

3 2F Under 1= stage 2 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 2 element used for overfrequencyprotection

4 3F Enable 1= enable stage 3 under/overfrequency protection

5 3F Under 1= stage 3 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 3 element used for overfrequencyprotection

Page 48: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 12 of 30

6 4F Enable 1= enable stage 4 under/overfrequency protection

7 4F Under 1= stage 4 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 4 element used for overfrequencyprotection

0603 1F SET Frequency setting for stage 1 under/overfrequencyprotection

0604 1tF SET Definite time delay for stage 1

0605 2F SET Frequency setting for stage 2 under/overfrequencyprotection

0606 2tF SET Definite time delay for stage 2

0607 3F SET Frequency setting for stage 3 under/overfrequencyprotection

0608 3tF SET Definite time delay for stage 3

0609 4F SET Frequency setting for stage 4 under/overfrequencyprotection

060A 4tF SET Definite time delay for stage 4

3.12 Negative sequence 1

Display Status Description

0700 NEG SEQ 1 READ Column heading

0701 NS Links PWP Software links to select the optional negative sequencevoltage functions

0 1V2 1= enable stage 1 negative sequence overvoltage

1 2V2 1= enable stage 2 negative sequence overvoltage

2 V2 Block 1= block close pulse when negative sequence voltageabove V2 Cl Bl setting

0702 1V2 SET Voltage setting for stage 1 negative sequenceovervoltage

0703 1V2Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 1 (definite time orinverse)

0704 1tV2 SET Time delay to be used for stage 1

0705 1V2 (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 1

0706 2V2 SET Voltage setting for stage 2 negative sequenceovervoltage

0707 2V2Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 2 (definite time orinverse)

0708 2tV2 SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

0709 2V2 (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 2

070A V2 Cl Bl SET Negative sequence voltage threshold to block a closepulse

Page 49: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 13 of 30

3.13 Neutral displacement 2

Display Status Description

0800 NEUT DISP 2 READ Column heading

0801 ND Links PWP Software links to select the optional neutral voltagedisplacement functions

0 1Vo 1= enable stage 1 neutral voltage displacement

1 2Vo 1= enable stage 2 neutral voltage displacement

2 3Vo 1= enable stage 3 neutral voltage displacement

3 Vo calc 1= enable Vo calculation and ignore Vo input(KVFG 142 only, unsettable otherwise)

0802 VT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the voltage transformer feeding therelay

0803 1Vo SET Voltage setting for stage 1 neutral voltage displacement

0804 1VoChar PWP Selected characteristic for stage 1 (definite time orinverse)

0805 1tVo SET Time delay to be used for stage 1

0806 1Vo (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 1

0807 2Vo SET Voltage setting for stage 2 neutral voltage displacement

0808 2VoChar PWP Selected characteristic for stage 2 (definite time orinverse)

0809 2tVo SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

080A 2Vo (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 2

080B 3Vo SET Voltage setting for stage 3 neutral voltage displacement

080C 3VoChar PWP Selected characteristic for stage 3 (definite time orinverse)

080D 3tVo SET Time delay to be used for stage 3

080E 3Vo (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 3

3.14 Under/overvoltage 2

Display Status Description

0900 UV/OV 2 READ Column heading

0901 VF Links PWP Software links to select the optional under/overvoltagefunctions

0 1V Enable 1= enable stage 1 under/overvoltage protection

1 1V Under 1= stage 1 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 1 element used for overvoltage protection

2 1V all =1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 1 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 1setting

3 2V Enable 1= enable stage 2 under/overvoltage protection

Page 50: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 14 of 30

4 2V Under 1= stage 2 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 2 element used for overvoltage protection

5 2V all=1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 2 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 2setting

6 3V Enable 1= enable stage 3 under/overvoltage protection

7 3V Under 1= stage 3 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 3 element used for overvoltage protection

8 3V all=1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 3 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 3setting

9 4V Enable 1= enable stage 4 under/overvoltage protection

A 4V Under 1= stage 4 element used for undervoltage protection;

0 = stage 4 element used for overvoltage protection

B 4V all=1 1= output for all phase below/above stage 4 setting

0 = output for any phases below/above stage 4setting

C Ph-N=1 1= use phase to neutral voltages for protection

0 = use phase to phase voltages for protectionThis applies to KVFG 142 and KVFG 122 withSDA = 1

D UV Block 1= enable blocking of all undervoltage elements whenmeasured voltage is below 15V

0902 VT Ratio PWP Overall ratio of the voltage transformer feeding therelay

0903 1V SET Voltage setting for stage 1 under/overvoltageprotection

0904 1V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 1 (definite time orinverse)

0905 1tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 1

0906 1V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 1

0907 2V SET Voltage setting for stage 2 under/overvoltageprotection

0908 2V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 2 (definite time orinverse)

0909 2tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

090A 2V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 2

090B 3V SET Voltage setting for stage 3 under/overvoltageprotection

090C 3V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 3 (definite time orinverse)

Page 51: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 15 of 30

090D 3tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 3

090E 3V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 3

090F 4V SET Voltage setting for stage 4 under/overvoltageprotection

0910 4V Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 4 (definite time orinverse)

0911 4tV SET Time delay to be used for stage 4

0912 4V (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 4

3.15 Under/overfrequency 2

Display Status Description

0A00 UF/OF 2 READ Column heading

0A01 FF Links PWP Software links to select the optional under/overfrequency functions

0 1F Enable 1= enable stage 1 under/overfrequency protection

1 1F Under 1= stage 1 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 1 element used for overfrequencyprotection

2 2F Enable 1= enable stage 2 under/overfrequency protection

3 2F Under 1= stage 2 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 2 element used for overfrequencyprotection

4 3F Enable 1= enable stage 3 under/overfrequency protection

5 3F Under 1= stage 3 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 3 element used for overfrequencyprotection

6 4F Enable 1= enable stage 4 under/overfrequency protection

7 4F Under 1= stage 4 element used for underfrequencyprotection;

0 = stage 4 element used for overfrequencyprotection

0A03 1F SET Frequency setting for stage 1 under/overfrequencyprotection

0A04 1tF SET Definite time delay for stage 1

0A05 2F SET Frequency setting for stage 2 under/overfrequencyprotection

0A06 2tF SET Definite time delay for stage 2

0A07 3F SET Frequency setting for stage 3 under/overfrequencyprotection

Page 52: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 16 of 30

0A08 3tF SET Definite time delay for stage 3

0A09 4F SET Frequency setting for stage 4 under/overfrequencyprotection

0A0A 4tF SET Definite time delay for stage 4

3.16 Negative sequence 2

Display Status Description

0B00 NEG SEQ 2 READ Column heading

0B01 NS Links PWP Software links to select the optional negative sequencevoltage functions

0 1V2 1= enable stage 1 negative sequence overvoltage

1 2V2 1= enable stage 2 negative sequence overvoltage

2 V2 Block 1= block close pulse when negative sequence voltageabove V2 Cl Bl setting

0B02 1V2 SET Voltage setting for stage 1 negative sequenceovervoltage

0B03 1V2Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 1 (definite time orinverse)

0B04 1tV2 SET Time delay to be used for stage 1

0B05 1V2 (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 1

0B06 2V2 SET Voltage setting for stage 2 negative sequenceovervoltage

0B07 2V2Char PWP Selected characteristic for stage 2 (definite time orinverse)

0B08 2tV2 SET Time delay to be used for stage 2

0B09 2V2 (tms) SET K factor to be used for stage 2

0B0A V2 Cl Bl SET Negative sequence voltage threshold to block a closepulse

3.17 Logic

Display Status Description

0C00 LOGIC READ Column heading

0C01 LOG Links PWP Software links to select the available optional logicfunctions

3 Aux2=DPU 1= enable tAUX2 as a delay on pick-up timer

0 = enable tAUX2 as a delay on drop off timer

5 Aux3=DPU 1= enable tAUX3 as a delay on pick-up timer

0=enable tAUX3 as a delay on drop off timer

6 Rly 7 Flags 1= enable output relay 7 to latch flags, generate fault& event records and CB ops

7 CB Rec 1=enable CB operations register to be incremented

0C02 tAUX1 SET Auxiliary timer 1 setting

Page 53: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 17 of 30

0C03 tAUX2 SET Auxiliary timer 2 setting

0C04 tAUX3 SET Auxiliary timer 3 setting

0C05 tTRIP SET Trip pulse time setting

0C06 tCLOSE SET Close pulse time setting

0C07 CB Ops> SET Alarm 1 setting for excessive circuit breaker operations

0C0F Display SET Default display that is selected on power-up

0 Manufacturer Manufacturer’s name

1 Description Description of product

2 Plant Ref Plant reference

3 3 Ph-Ph 3 phase-phase voltages

4 Ph-Ph ND F A – B phase-phase, neutral displacement andfrequency

5 Ph-N ND F A – N phase-neutral, neutral displacement andfrequency

6 3Ph-Ph ND 3 phase-phase voltages and neutral displacement

7 3Ph-N ND 3 phase-neutral voltages and neutral displacement

8 PSV NSV F Positive sequence voltage, negative sequencevoltage and frequency

9 MAX MIN Mod2 Max phase-phase voltage, min phase-phase voltage,Max phase-neutral voltage and min phase-neutralvoltage

10 MAX MIN Mod1 Max phase-phase voltage and min phase-phasevoltage

11 Alarm Status Alarm status

3.18 Input masks

Display Status Description

0D00 INPUT MASKS READ Column heading

0D01 Blk 1tVo PWP Logic input to block first stage neutral voltagedisplacement timer

0D02 Blk 2tVo PWP Logic input to block second stage neutral voltagedisplacement timer

0D03 Blk 3tVo PWP Logic input to block third stage neutral voltagedisplacement timer

0D04 Blk 1tV PWP Logic input to block first stage under/overvoltage timer

0D05 Blk 2tV PWP Logic input to block second stage under/overvoltagetimer

0D06 Blk 3tV PWP Logic input to block third stage under/overvoltage timer

0D07 Blk 4tV PWP Logic input to block fourth stage under/overvoltagetimer

0D08 Blk 1tF PWP Logic input to block first stage under/overfrequencytimer

Page 54: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 18 of 30

0D09 Blk 2tF PWP Logic input to block second stage under/overfrequencytimer

0D0A Blk 3tF PWP Logic input to block third stage under/overfrequencytimer

0D0B Blk 4tF PWP Logic input to block fourth stage under/overfrequencytimer

0D0C Blk 1tV2 PWP Logic input to block first stage negative sequenceovervoltage timer

0D0D Blk 2tV2 PWP Logic input to block second stage negative sequenceovervoltage timer

0D0E L Trip PWP Logic input to initiate trip pulse timer from external input

0D0F L Close PWP Logic input to initiate close pulse timer from externalinput

0D10 Ext Trip PWP Logic input to initiate records from an external tripsignal

0D11 Aux 1 PWP Logic input to initiate timer tAUX1 from external input

0D12 Aux 2 PWP Logic input to initiate timer tAUX2 from external input

0D13 Aux 3 PWP Logic input to initiate timer tAUX3 from external input

0D14 Set Grp 2 PWP Logic input to select group 2 protection settings fromexternal input

0D15 CB Closed PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in closed position

0D16 CB Open PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in open position

0D17 Bus2 PWP Logic input to indicate circuit breaker in bus 2 position

3.19 Relay masks

Display Status Description

0E00 RELAY MASKS READ Column heading

0E01 1tVo PWP First stage time delayed neutral voltage displacementoutput

0E02 2tVo PWP Second stage time delayed neutral voltagedisplacement output

0E03 3tVo PWP Third stage time delayed neutral voltage displacementoutput

0E04 1tVa(-b) PWP First stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase A (-B)

0E05 1tVb(-c) PWP First stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase B (-C)

0E06 1tVc(-a) PWP First stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase C (-A)

0E07 2tVa(-b) PWP Second stage time delayed under/overvoltage outputfor phase A (-B)

0E08 2tVb(-c) PWP Second stage time delayed under/overvoltage outputfor phase B (-C)

Page 55: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 19 of 30

0E09 2tVc(-a) PWP Second stage time delayed under/overvoltage outputfor phase C (-A)

0E0A 3tVa(-b) PWP Third stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase A (-B)

0E0B 3tVb(-c) PWP Third stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase B (-C)

0E0C 3tVc(-a) PWP Third stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase C (-A)

0E0D 4tVa(-b) PWP Fourth stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase A (-B)

0E0E 4tVb(-c) PWP Fourth stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase B (-C)

0E0F 4tVc(-a) PWP Fourth stage time delayed under/overvoltage output forphase C (-A)

0E10 1tF PWP First stage time delayed under/overfrequency output

0E11 2tF PWP Second stage time delayed under/overfrequency output

0E12 3tF PWP Third stage time delayed under/overfrequency output

0E13 4tF PWP Fourth stage time delayed under/overfrequency output

0E14 1tV2 PWP First stage time delayed negative sequence overvoltageoutput

0E15 2tV2 PWP Second stage time delayed negative sequenceovervoltage output

0E16 CB Trip PWP Trip pulse output

0E17 CB Close PWP Close pulse output

0E18 Aux1 PWP Output from the auxiliary 1 time delayed function

0E19 Aux2 PWP Output from the auxiliary 2 time delayed function

0E1A Aux3 PWP Output from the auxiliary 3 time delayed function

0E1B Level 1 PWP Output in response to command to load shed to level 1

0E1C Level 2 PWP Output in response to command to load shed to level 2

0E1D Level 3 PWP Output in response to command to load shed to level 3

0E1E CB Alarm PWP Alarm for circuit breaker maintenance

3.20 Recorder

Display Status Description

0F00 RECORDER READ Column heading

0F01 Control SET Manual stop/start control (Running = started; triggered= stopped)

0F02 Capture SET Select the functions to be captured: Magnitudes/phaseangles/samples

0F03 Post Trigger SET Select the number of samples recorded after the trigger(1 to 511)

Page 56: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 20 of 30

0F04 Logic Trig SET Select the logic input to trigger the recorder(0 to 7 pick-up or drop-off)

0 +Opto0 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L0

1 +Opto1 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L1

2 +Opto2 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L2

3 +Opto3 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L3

4 +Opto4 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L4

5 +Opto5 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L5

6 +Opto6 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L6

7 +Opto7 Trigger in response to energisation of logic input L7

8 -Opto0 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L0

9 -Opto1 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L1

A -Opto2 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L2

B -Opto3 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L3

C -Opto4 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L4

D -Opto5 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L5

E -Opto6 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L6

F -Opto7 Trigger in response to de-energisation of logic input L7

0F05 Relay Trig SET Select the output relay to trigger the recorder(0 to 7 pick-up or drop-off)

0 +Rly 0 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 0

1 +Rly 1 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 1

2 +Rly 2 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 2

3 +Rly 3 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 3

4 +Rly 4 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 4

5 +Rly 5 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 5

6 +Rly 6 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 6

7 +Rly 7 Trigger in response to energisation of output relay RLY 7

8 -Rly 0 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 0

9 -Rly 1 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 1

A -Rly 2 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 2

B -Rly 3 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 3

C -Rly 4 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 4

D -Rly 5 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 5

E -Rly 6 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 6

F -Rly 7 Trigger in response to de-energisation of output relay RLY 7

Page 57: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 21 of 30

Section. 4 CHANGING TEXT AND SETTINGS

Settings and text in certain cells of the menu can be changed via the user interface.To do this the cover must be removed from the front of the relay so that the [+] and[–] keys can be accessed.

4.1 Quick guide to menu controls

Quick guide to menu control with the four keys

Current display Key press Effect of action

Default display [0] long Back–light turns ON – no other effect

[0] short Steps through the available default displays

[F] steps down to column heading SYSTEMDATA

[+] Back-light turns ON – no other effect

[–] Back-light turns ON – no other effect

Fault flags after a trip [0] short Back-light turns ON – no other effect

[F] steps down to column heading SYSTEMDATA without resetting the fault flags

[0] long resets trip LED and returns default display

[+] Back-light turns ON – no other effect

[–] Back-light turns ON – no other effect

Column heading [0] short Back-light turns ON – no other effect

[0] long Re-establishes password protectionimmediately and returns the default display

[F] long move to next column heading

[F] short steps down the menu to the next item inthe column

[–] move to next column heading

[+] move to previous column heading

Any menu cell [F] short steps down the menu to the next item inthe column

[F] long displays the heading for the next column

[F] + [0] steps back up the menu to the previousitem

[0] short Back-light turns ON – no other effect

[0] long Resets the value if the cell is resettable

Any settable cell [+] or [–] Puts the relay in setting mode. Thepassword must first be entered for protectedcells

Page 58: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 22 of 30

Current display Key press Effect of action

Setting mode [0] Escapes from the setting mode without asetting change

[+] Increments value – with increasing rapidityif held

[–] Decrements value – with increasing rapidityif held

[F] Changes to the confirmation display

[F] If function links, relay or input masks aredisplayed the [F] key will step through themfrom left to right and finally changing to theconfirmation display

Confirmation mode [+] Confirms setting and enters new setting ortext

[–] Returns prospective change to check/modify

[0] Escapes from the setting mode without asetting change

The actions shown in the shaded area can only be performed when the cover is removed.

[F] long means press F key and hold for longer than 1s

[F] short means press F key and hold for less than 1s

[F] means press the F key length of time does not change the response

4.2 To enter setting mode

Give the [F] key a momentary press to change from the selected default displayand switch on the back-light; the heading SYSTEM DATA will be displayed.

Use the [+] and [–] keys, or a long press of the [F] key, to select the columncontaining the setting, or text that is to be changed. Then with the [F] key stepdown the column until the contents of that cell are displayed. Press the [+] key toput the relay into the setting mode. Setting mode will be indicated by a flashingcursor on the bottom line of the display. If the cell is read-only, or passwordprotected, then the cursor will not appear and the relay will not be in the settingmode.

4.3 To escape from the setting mode

IMPORTANT! If at any time you wish to escape from the setting mode withoutmaking a change to the contents of the selected cell: Hold the [0]key depressed for 1s, the original setting will be returned and therelay will exit the setting mode.

4.4 To accept the new setting

Press the [F] key until the confirmation display appears:

Are you sure?

+ = YES – = NO

Press the [0] key if you decide not to make any change.

Page 59: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 23 of 30

Press the [–] key if you want to further modify the data before entry.

Press the [+] key to accept the change. This will terminate the setting mode.

4.5 Password protection

Password protection is provided for the configuration settings of the relay.

This includes time characteristic selection, VT ratios, function links, input masks andrelay masks. Any accidental change to configuration could seriously affect theability of the relay to perform its intended functions, whereas, a setting error mayonly cause a grading problem. Individual settings are protected from change whenthe relay cover is in place by preventing direct access to the [+] and [–] keys.

The password consists of four characters that may contain any upper case letterfrom the alphabet. The password is initially set in the factory to AAAA, but it canbe changed by the user to another combination if necessary. If the password is lostor forgotten, access to the relay will be denied. However, if the manufacturer ortheir agent is supplied with the serial number of the relay, a back-up password canbe supplied that is unique to that particular product.

4.6 Entering passwords

Using the [F] key, select the password cell [0002] in the SYSTEM DATA column ofthe menu. The word “Password” is displayed and four stars. Press the [+] key andthe cursor will appear under the left hand star. Now use the [+] key to step throughthe alphabet until the required letter is displayed. The display will increment fasterif the key is held down and the [–] key can be used in a similar way to movebackwards through the alphabet. When the desired character has been set the [F]key can be given a momentary press to move the cursor to the position for the nextcharacter. The process is then repeated to enter the remaining characters thatmake up the password. When the fourth character is acknowledged by amomentary press of the [F] key the display will read:

Are you sure?

+ = YES – = NO

Press the [0] key if you decide not to enter the password.

Press the [–] key if you want to modify the entry.

Press the [+] to enter the password.

The display will then show four stars and if the password was accepted the alarmLED will flash. If the alarm LED is not flashing the password was not accepted – afurther attempt can be made to enter it, or the [F] key pressed to move to the nextcell.

Note: When the password cell is displayed, do not press the [+] or [–] key whilstthe alarm LED is flashing unless you want to change the password!

4.7 Changing passwords

When the password has been entered and the alarm LED is flashing the [+] key ispressed to put the relay in setting mode. A new password can now be entered asdescribed in Section 4.6. After entering the fourth character make a note of thenew password shown on the display before pressing the [F] key to obtain theconfirmation display.

Are you sure?

+ = YES – = NO

Page 60: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 24 of 30

Press the [0] key if you decide not to enter the new password.

Press the [–] key if you want to modify your entry.

Press the [+] to enter the new password (which will then replace the old one).

Note: Make sure the new password has been written down before it is enteredand that the password being entered agrees with the written copy beforeaccepting it. If the new password is not entered correctly you may bedenied access in the future. If the password is lost a back–up passwordunique to that relay can be provided from the factory, or certain agents, ifthe serial number of the product is quoted.

4.8 Restoration of password protection

Password protection is reinstated when the alarm LED stops flashing. This will occurfifteen minutes after the last key press. To restore the password protection withoutwaiting for the fifteen minute time-out, select the password cell or any columnheading and hold the reset key [0] depressed for 1s. The alarm LED will cease toflash to indicate the password protection is restored.

4.9 Entering text

Enter the setting mode as described in Section 4.2 and move the cursor with the [F]key to where the text is to be entered or changed. Then using the [+] and [–] keys,select the character to be displayed. The [F] key may then be used to move thecursor to the position of the next character and so on. Follow the instructions inSection 4.4 to exit from the setting change.

4.10 Changing function links

Select the column heading required and step down to the function links “SD Links”,“ND Links”, “VF Links”, “FF Links”, “NS Links” or “LOG links” and press either the[+] or [–] key to put the relay in a setting change mode. A cursor will flash on thebottom line at the extreme left position. This is link “F”; as indicated by thecharacter printed on the frontplate under the display.

Press the [F] key to step along the row of links, one link at a time, until some textappears on the top line that describes the function of a link. The [+] key willchange the link to a “1” to select the function and the [–] key will change it to a“0” to deselect it. Follow the instructions in Section 4.4 to accept the settingchange.

Not all links can be set, some being factory selected and locked. The links that arelocked in this way are usually those for functions that are not supported by aparticular relay, when they will be set to “0”. Merely moving the cursor past a linkposition does not change it in any way.

4.11 Changing setting values

Move through the menu until the cell that is to be edited is displayed. Press the [+]or [–] key to put the relay into the setting change mode. A cursor will flash in theextreme left hand position on the bottom line of the display to indicate that therelay is ready to have the setting changed. The value will be incremented in singlesteps by each momentary press of the [+] key, or if the [+] key is held down thevalue will be incremented with increasing rapidity until the key is released.Similarly the [–] key can be used to decrement the value. Follow the instructions inSection 4.4 to exit from the setting change.

Page 61: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 25 of 30

Note: When entering VT RATIO the overall ratio should be entered,ie. 11kV/110V VT has an overall ratio of 100:1. With rated voltageapplied the relay will display 110V when the VT RATIO has the defaultvalue of 1:1 and when the ratio is set to 100:1 the displayed value will be100 x 110V = 11kV.

4.12 Setting communication address

The communication address will be set to 255, the global address to all relays onthe network, when the relay is first supplied. Reply messages are not issued fromany relay for a global command, because they would all respond at the same timeand result in contention on the bus. Setting the address to 255 will ensure thatwhen first connected to the network they will not interfere with communications onexisting installations. The communication address can be manually set by selectingthe appropriate cell for the SYSTEM DATA column, entering the setting mode asdescribed in Section 4.2 and then decrementing or incrementing the address.

Then exit setting mode as described in Section 4.4.

To automatically allocate an address to the relay, see Chapter 6.

4.13 Setting input masks

An eight bit mask is allocated to each protection and control function that can beinfluenced by an external input applied to one or more of the logic inputs.

When the menu cell for an input mask is selected the top line of the display showstext describing the function to be controlled by the inputs selected in the mask.

A series of “1”s and “0”s on the bottom line of the display indicates which logicinputs are selected to exert control. The numbers printed on the frontplate under thedisplay indicate each of the logic inputs (L7 to L0) being displayed.

A “1” indicates that a particular input is assigned to the displayed control functionand a “0” indicates that it is not. The same input may be used to control more thanone function.

4.14 Setting output masks

An eight bit mask is allocated to each protection and control function. When amask is selected the text on the top line of the display indicates the associatedfunction and the bottom line of the display shows a series of “1”s and “0”s for theselected mask. The numbers printed on the frontplate under the display indicate theoutput relay (RLY7 to RLY0) to which each bit is associated. A “1” indicates that therelay will respond to the displayed function and a “0” indicates that it will not.

A logical “OR” function is performed on the relay masks so that more than onerelay may be allocated to more than one function. An output mask may be set tooperate the same relay as another mask so that, for example, one output relaymay be arranged to operate for all the functions required to trip the circuit breakerand another for only those functions that are to initiate autoreclose.

4.15 Resetting values and records

Some values and records can be reset to zero, or some predefined value.

To achieve this the menu cell must be displayed and then the [0] key helddepressed for at least one second to effect the reset. The fault records are slightlydifferent because they are a group of settings and to reset these the last cell under

Page 62: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 26 of 30

FLT RECORDS must be selected. This will display:

Clear = [0]

To reset ALL FIVE fault records hold the [0] key depressed for more than 1s. If therecords are not cleared the oldest record will be overwritten by the next fault.

4.16 Resetting trip LED indication

The trip LED can be reset when the flags for the last fault are displayed. They aredisplayed automatically after a trip occurs, or can be selected in the fault recordcolumn. The reset is effected by depressing the [0] key for 1s. Resetting the faultrecords as described in 4.15 will also reset the trip LED indication.

If link SD5 is set to ”1” the trip LED can be reset by energising a logic input thathas been allocated in the input mask [OD11 tAUX1]. If link SD8 is also set to “1”then the trip LED will reset when the disturbance recorder has been triggered andthe delay set for tAUX1 has expired.

4.17 Selecting default display

The selection of the default display from the cell 0C0F “Display” has the followingoptions, ‘Manufacturer’, ‘Description’, ‘Plant Ref’, ‘3 Ph-Ph’, ‘Ph-Ph ND F’,‘Ph N ND F’, ‘3Ph-Ph ND’, ‘3Ph N ND’, ‘PSV NSV F’, ‘MAX MIN Mod2’,‘MAX MIN Mod1’ and ‘Alarms’.

However, depending on the relay type and configuration, not all the options canbe displayed as default. If an option is selected but cannot be displayed, thedefault display will be the next available selection. The following tabledemonstrates which default display is shown when each default selection is made.

KVFG 142 KVFG 122 KVFG 122

3Ph Vo plus Vo plusmeasurements other other

Ph-Ph Ph-Ph Ph-N

Selection Display Display Display Display

Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer

Description Description Description Description Description

Plant Ref Plant Ref Plant Ref Plant Ref Plant Ref

3 Ph-Ph 3Ph-Ph ND 3 Ph-Ph Ph-Ph ND F Ph-Ph ND F

Ph-Ph ND F 3Ph-Ph ND PSV NSV F Ph-Ph ND F Ph-N ND F

Ph-N ND F 3Ph-Ph ND PSV NSV F Alarm Status Ph-N ND F

3Ph-Ph ND 3Ph-Ph ND PSV NSV F Alarm Status Alarm Status

3Ph-N ND 3Ph-N ND PSV NSV F Alarm Status Alarm Status

PSV NSV F PSV NSV F PSV NSV F Alarm Status Alarm Status

MAX MIN Mod2 MAX MIN Mod2 MAX MIN Mod1 Alarm Status Alarm Status

MAX MIN Mod1 Alarm Status MAX MIN Mod1 Alarm Status Alarm Status

Alarm Status Alarm Status Alarm Status Alarm Status Alarm Status

Page 63: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 27 of 30

Section. 5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Standard connection table – KVFG 142

Function Terminals Function

Earth terminal – 1 2 – Not used

Watchdog relay break 3 4 make Watchdog relay

(break contact) – 5 6 – (make contact)

48V field voltage [+] 7 8 [–] 48V field voltage

Not used – 9 10 – Not used

Not used – 15 16 – Not used

Auxiliary voltage input (+) 13 14 (–) Auxiliary voltage input

Not used – 15 16 – Not used

A phase voltage IN 17 18 IN B phase voltage

C phase voltage IN 19 20 OUT Phase voltage ref.

Residual voltage IN 21 22 OUT Residual voltage ref.

Not used 23 24 Not used

Not used 25 26 Not used

Not used 27 28 Not used

Output relay 4 – 29 30 – Output relay 0

31 32

Output relay 5 – 33 34 – Output relay 1

35 36

Output relay 6 – 37 38 – Output relay 2

39 40

Output relay 7 – 41 42 – Output relay 3

43 44

Opto control input L3 (+) 45 46 (+) Opto control input L0

Opto control input L4 (+) 47 48 (+) Opto control input L1

Opto control input L5 (+) 49 50 (+) Opto control input L2

Opto control input L6 (+) 51 52 (–) Common L0/L1/L2

Opto control input L7 (+) 53 54 – K-BUS serial port

Common L3/L4/L5/L6/L7 (–) 55 56 – K-BUS serial port

Key to connection tables

[+] and [–] indicate the polarity of the dc output from these terminals

(+) and (–) indicate the polarity for the applied dc supply

IN/OUT the signal direction for forward operation

Page 64: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 28 of 30

Notes: The KVFG 122 does not utilise the following terminals, voltage inputs 17 &18, relay outputs RL4 to RL7 and opto isolated inputs L3 to L7. The voltageterminals 19 & 20 may be configured to measure ph–ph or ph–n voltagesand case terminals 21 & 22 can be used for either ph–ph or residualvoltage measurement.

All relays have standard Midos terminal blocks to which connections can bemade with either 4mm screws or 4.8mm pre-insulated snap-on connectors.Two connections can be made to each terminal.

5.1 Auxiliary supply

The auxiliary voltage may be dc or ac provided it is within the limiting voltages forthe particular relay. The voltage range will be found on the frontplate of the relay;it is marked (Vx = (24V – 125V) or (48V – 250V). An ideal supply to use fortesting the relays will be 50V dc or 110V ac because these values fall within bothof the auxiliary voltage ranges.

The supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 only. To avoid anyconfusion it is recommended that the polarity of any applied voltage is kept to theMidos standard:

– for dc supplies the positive lead connected to terminal 13 and the negative toterminal 14

– for ac supplies the live lead is connected to terminal 13 and the neutral lead toterminal 14.

5.2 Logic control inputs

There are a number of logic control inputs to the relay that are optically coupled toprovide galvanic isolation between the external and internal circuits. They arerated at 48V and the power supply within the relay provides an isolated fieldvoltage to energise them. This arrangement keeps the power consumption of theseinputs to a minimum and ensures that they always have a supply to energise themwhen the relay is operational.

Software filtering is applied to prevent induced ac signals in the external wiringcausing operation of logic inputs. This is achieved by sampling the logic inputseight times per cycle and five consecutive samples have to indicate that the input isenergised in a positive sense before it is accepted. This ensures that the inputs arerelatively immune to spurious operation from induced ac signals in the wiring.The capture times are:

12 ±2.5ms at 50Hz and 10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz

Note: These inputs will not capture a fleeting contact unless it dwells in the closedstate for a time exceeding the above values.

The opto-isolated logic control inputs are divided into two groups. Three (L0, L1,L2) have their common connection on terminal 52 and the remainder (L3, L4, L5,L6, L7) have their common connection on terminal 55. When they are to beenergised from the field voltage then terminals 52 and 55 must be connected toterminal 8, the negative of the field voltage. The logic inputs can then be energisedby connecting a volt free contact between the positive of the field voltage, terminal7, and the terminal for the appropriate logic input.

The circuit for each opto-isolated input contains a blocking diode to protect it fromany damage that may result from the application of voltage with incorrect polarity.

Page 65: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 29 of 30

Where the opto-isolated input of more than one relay is to be controlled by thesame contact it will be necessary to connect terminal 7 of each relay together toform a common line. In the example circuit below, contact X operates L1 of relay 1and contact Y operates L0 of relay 1 as well as L0 and L1 of relay 2. There are noconnections made to L2 as it is not used on either relay.

Figure 3 Connection to opto-isolated control inputs

The logic inputs can be separated into two isolated groups when it is necessary toenergise some from the station battery. The logic inputs are rated at 48V and it willbe necessary to connect an external resistor in series with the input if the battery isof higher rated voltage. The value of this resistor should be 2.4kΩ for everyadditional 10V.

The field voltage is not earthed and has insulation rated for 2kV for 1 minute.

5.3 Analogue inputs

The relays have either four (KVFG 142) or two (KVFG 122) analogue inputsdepending on the model. All inputs are routed to the microprocessor board.Each is fed via an input transducer (VT), a low pass filter and a three range scalingamplifier. This amplifier has automatic gain control which automatically adjusts inaccordance with the input signal amplitude. The amplifier gain increases as theinput signal amplitude reduces to provide optimum measurement resolution and alarge dynamic range. The analogue signals are sampled eight times per cycle oneach channel as the sampling rate tracks the frequency of the input signal.

5.4 Output relays

Four programmable output relays are provided on the KVFG 122 relay and eighton the KVFG 142. They can be arranged to operate in response to any or all ofthe available functions by suitably setting the output masks. The protection andcontrol functions to which these relays respond are selectable via the menu systemof the relay.

In addition there is a watchdog relay which has one make and one break contact.Thus it can indicate both healthy and failed conditions. As these contacts aremainly used for alarm purposes they have a lower rating than the programmableoutputs. The terminal numbers for the output relay contacts are given in the table atthe start of Section 5.

L0 46

L1 48

L2

52

8

48V

Relay 1

7+ +48V

Relay 2

L0

L1

L2

8

7

Common line

46

48

50

52

50

X Y

_ _

Page 66: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 3

Page 30 of 30

5.5 Ouput relay minimum dwell time

Outputs from each stage of protection outputs tVo, tVa, tVb, tVc, tF and tV2 have aminimum dwell of 100ms. The contact dwell ensures a positive trip signal is givento the circuit breaker.

All other outputs such as Aux1, Aux2, Aux3, Level 1/2/3 and CB Alarm have nodeliberate dwell time added to them. This is because they are either followed by atimer, or used for control purposes which require a faster reset time.

5.6 Setting the relay with a PC or laptop

Connection to a personal computer (PC) or lap top via a K-Bus/RS232 interfacetype KITZ 101 will enable settings to be changed more easily. Software isavailable for the PC that allows on line setting changes in a more user friendly waywith a whole column of data being displayed instead of just single cells. Settingfiles can also be saved to floppy disk and downloaded to other relays of the sametype. There are also programs available to enable setting files to be generated off-line, ie. remote from the relays that can be later down-loaded as necessary.

The communication connections and available software are covered under“Applications” in Chapter 6.

Section 6. ALARM FLAGS

A full list of the alarm flags will be found in Section 3.5 and is located in cell 0022of the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu. They consist of eight characters that maybe either “1” or “0” to indicate the set and reset states respectively.The control keys perform for this menu cell in the same way as they do for functionlinks. The cell is selected with the function key [F] and the relay then put in thesetting mode by pressing the [+] key to display the cursor. The cursor will then bestepped through the alarm word from left to right with each press of the [F] keyand text identifying the alarm bit selected will be displayed.

The only alarm flag that can be manually set is the bit 6, the watchdog test flag.When this flag is set to “1” the watchdog relay will change state and the greenLED will extinguish.

When any alarm flag is set the alarm LED will be continuously lit. However, there isanother form of alarm condition that will cause the alarm LED to flash and thisindicates that the password has been entered to allow access to change protectedsettings within the relay. This is not generally available as a remote alarm and itdoes not generate an alarm flag.

Note: No control will be possible via the key pad if the “unconfigured” alarm israised because the relay will be locked in a non-operate state.

Page 67: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 4Application of Protection Functions

Page 68: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 69: AREVA KVFG R8559C

1 CONFIGURATION 11.1 Configuring the relay 11.2 Default configuration 12 CHANGING THE CONFIGURATION OF THE RELAY 22.1 System data (SD) 22.2 Neutral displacement links (ND) 32.3 Under/overvoltage links (VF) 32.4 Under/overfrequency links (FF) 52.5 Negative sequence links (NS) 52.6 Logic links (LOG) 63. NEUTRAL DISPLACEMENT (RESIDUAL OVERVOLTAGE) PROTECTION 73.1 Application 73.2 Voltage settings 103.3 Definite time settings 103.4 Inverse time curve settings 113.5 Setting guidelines 114. UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 114.1 Application 114.2 Voltage settings 144.3 Definite time settings 144.4 Inverse time curve settings 154.5 Undervoltage setting guidelines 154.6 Overvoltage setting guidelines 155. UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION 165.1 Application 165.2 Frequency settings 175.3 Definite time settings 175.4 Setting guidelines 185.4.1 Underfrequency setting guidelines5.4.2 Overfrequency setting guidelines 196. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION 196.1 Application 196.2 Voltage settings 206.3 Definite time settings 206.4 Inverse time curve settings 206.5 Setting guidelines 217. UNDERVOLTAGE BLOCKING 217.1 Blocking the undervoltage elements 217.1.1 Extended time delays 227.1.2 CB Auxiliary contact monitoring 227.1.3 Undervoltage blocking 227.2 Blocking the frequency elements 228. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE BLOCKING 239. AUXILIARY TIMERS 24

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Contents

Page 70: AREVA KVFG R8559C

10. SETTING GROUP SELECTION 2510.1 Remote change of setting group 2510.2 Controlled change of setting group 25

FIGURES

Figure 1a. Residual voltage measured on a solidly earthed system 7

Figure 1b. Residual voltage measured on an impedance earthed system 8

Figure 2. Neutral voltage displacement protection logic 9

Figure 3. Under and overvoltage protectionlogic 13

Figure 4. Under/overfrequency protection logic 17

Figure 5. Co-ordination of underfrequency protection 18

Figure 6. Negative sequence overvoltage protection logic 19

Figure 7a. Undervoltage blocking logic (KVFG 122) 21

Figure 8. CB control logic including blocking signals 23

Figure 9. Auxiliary timers 24

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Contents

Page 71: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 1 of 25

Section 1 CONFIGURATION

The settings that customise the relay for a particular application are referred to asthe configuration. They include the function links, input masks, relay masks, etc.and are password protected to prevent them being changed accidentally. Togetherthese settings select the functions that are to be made available and how they areto be interconnected.

Before the advent of integrated numerical relays, protection and control schemescomprised individual relays that had to be interconnected and a diagram wasproduced to show these interconnections. The configuration of a numerical relay isthe software equivalent of these interconnections. With the software approach,installations can be completed in much shorter times, especially for repeatschemes, saving valuable time and cost. A second advantage is the ability to makesome changes without having to disturb the external wiring.

Before the connection diagrams can be drawn for an installation, it will benecessary to decide how the logic within the relay is to function. A copy of thelogic diagram will be found at the back of this manual. It should be copied and theappropriate squares in the input and relays masks should be shaded in to showwhich logic inputs and output relays are to be assigned in each mask. The functionlinks should then be drawn on the diagram in position “0” or “1” as required.

These software links may turn functions on, or off, and when in the “off” state someunnecessary settings may not appear in the menu. As supplied the fourth under/overvoltage stage is turned off and its associated settings 4V/4V Char/4tV/4V(tms) will not appear in the menu. The function link settings can now be read offthe logic diagram and entered as a series of ones and zeros, in the boxesprovided on the logic diagram.

Case connection diagrams will be found at the back of this manual for the currentmodels of K Range voltage and frequency relays. They may be copied and notesadded in the appropriate boxes to indicate the function of the logic inputs andrelay outputs. This diagram will then give the appropriate terminal numbers towhich the external wires must be connected. In particular, it will show the terminalnumbers to which the voltage transformer connections are to be made.

Enough information is available from the logic and case connection diagrams toenable the full external wiring diagrams to be drawn and the operation ofcomplete protection and control scheme to be understood.

1.1 Configuring the relay

Each scheme of protection and control will have its own particular configurationsettings. These can be named appropriately and the name entered as the“description” in cell 0004 in the system data column of the menu. If the scheme islikely to become a standard that is to be applied to several installations it would beworthwhile storing the configuration on a floppy disc so that it can be downloadedto other relays.

The configuration file can be made even more useful by adding appropriategeneral settings for the protection and control functions. It will then only require theminimum of settings to be changed during commissioning of the installation.

1.2 Default configuration

The relays are provided with a basic configuration and typical settings to suit abasic application. The basic configuration provides:

Page 72: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 2 of 25

Single stage undervoltage (definite time)

Single stage overvoltage (definite time)

CB maintenance alarm (KVFG 122 only)

Single stage neutral voltage displacement (definite time, KVFG 142 only)

Single stage underfrequency (definite time, KVFG 142 only)

Single stage overfrequency (definite time, KVFG 142 only)

Remote circuit breaker control (KVFG 142 only)

Section. 2 CHANGING THE CONFIGURATION OF THE RELAY

2.1 System data (SD)

Select the system data column of the menu, enter the password and then step downto the cell containing the SD links. Press the [+] key to put the relays into settingmode and use to [F] key to step through the options. The option will be shown inabbreviated form on the top line of the display as each function link is selected.To select an option set the link to “1” with the [+] key and to deselect it set it to “0”with the [–] key.

The following options are available via links SD0 to SDA:

SD 0 Rem ChgStg 1 = enable remote setting changes

SD 1 Not used

SD 2 Rem CB Ctrl 1 = enable remote control of circuit breaker

SD 3 Rem ChgGrp 1 = enable remote change of setting group

SD 4 En Grp2 1 = enable group 2 settings to be used

SD 5 FlagReset 1 = enable flags to be reset automatically

SD 6 Not used

SD 7 Log Evts 1 = enable logic events to be stored

SD 8 Aut Rec Rst 1 = enable automatic reset method for disturbancerecord.

SD 9 CBcloseRst 1 = enable circuit breaker close pulse to beterminated by a trip signal

SD A OP Mode 1 = neutral voltage displacement protection

0 = selects 3 phase measurement mode(Applies to KVFG 122 only)

When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until theconfirmation display appears and confirm the selection.

Now step down the menu to cell [0004 Description] and enter a suitable name forthe configuration; a maximum of sixteen characters are available.

Step down one cell [0005 Plant Ref.], where a suitable reference can be enteredfor the plant that the relay is to protect. If the configuration is for a relay that is tobe applied to one particular circuit, then the reference by which the circuit isknown can be entered at this time; a maximum of sixteen characters are available.

Page 73: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 3 of 25

Now move down the system data column to cell [0009 Freq] and set the frequencyto 50Hz or 60Hz as appropriate. This is an important setting because it will be thedefault frequency used by the analogue/digital converter when appropriatesignals are not available for frequency tracking.

If the address of the relay on the serial communication bus is known then it can beentered at this time. This cell is password protected.

This concludes the settings that can be entered in this menu column at this time.

2.2 Neutral displacement links (ND)

Select the column NEUT DISP (1) and ND links. Press the [+] key to put the relayinto setting mode and set the links to “1” that enable the required options availablevia links ND0 to ND3.

ND 0 1Vo 1 = enable neutral voltage displacement stage 1

ND 1 2Vo 1 = enable neutral voltage displacement stage 2

ND 2 3Vo 1 = enable neutral voltage displacement stage 3

ND 3 Vo Calc 1 = enable Vo calculation and ignore Vo input(KVFG 142 only)

If the KVFG 122 is being used, with system data link SDA set to 0, this selectsphase to phase voltage measurement mode. As such the neutral voltagedisplacement protection will not be available.

Setting ND3 refers to the KVFG 142 only. On this relay, it is possible to measurethe three phase to ground voltages, and hence a calculation of the residual voltagecan be made. However, it should be considered that this calculated value willgenerally be less accurate than the measured value. Refer to Section 3.2.

When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until theconfirmation display appears and then confirm the selection.

Next enter the time delay characteristics for the enabled elements.

Enter, or copy, the same settings into the NEUT DISP (2) column if it is active. It isnot essential that the links are set the same in both setting groups. For example the3Vo element could be made available in group one and not in group two settings.

Note: It would be wise to ensure the logic is such that an element that is to beswitched out in the alternative setting group is reset before the alternativesetting group is selected, or alternatively make a physical test to ensurethere are no latch-up problems.

A different time characteristic can be selected for each element in the secondsetting group, but it is not advisable to select inverse in one group and definite timein the other if it is intended to dynamically switch between setting groups.If different characteristics are selected then the same register will be used for both.These registers are not reset to zero when the setting group is changed unless thevoltage falls below the set threshold.

2.3 Under/overvoltage links (VF)

Select the VF links under the UV/OV 1 menu column heading and put the relayinto setting mode by pressing the [+] key. Step through the function links with the[F] key and set the links for the options required.

Page 74: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 4 of 25

VF 0 1V Enable 1 = enable stage 1 under/overvoltage element

VF 1 1V Under 1 = stage 1 set for undervoltage protection

0 = stage 1 set for overvoltage protection

VF 2 1V all = 1 1 = stage 1 output only if all phases operate

0 = stage 1 output if any phase operates

VF 3 2V Enable 1 = enable stage 2 under/overvoltage element

VF 4 2V Under 1 = stage 2 set for undervoltage protection

0 = stage 2 set for overvoltage protection

VF 5 2V all = 1 1 = stage 2 output only if all phases operate

0 = stage 2 output if any phase operates

VF 6 3V Enable 1 = enable stage 3 under/overvoltage element

VF 7 3V Under 1 = stage 3 set for undervoltage protection

0 = stage 3 set for overvoltage protection

VF 8 3V all = 1 1 = stage 3 output only if all phases operate

0 = stage 3 output if any phase operates

VF 9 4V Enable 1 = enable stage 4 under/overvoltage element

VF A 4V Under 1 = stage 4 set for undervoltage protection

0 = stage 4 set for overvoltage protection

VF B 4V all = 1 1 = stage 4 output only if all phases operate

0 = stage 4 output if any phase operates

VF C Ph-N = 1 1 = utilise phase to neutral voltages for protection

0 = utilise phase to phase voltages for protection

VF D UV Block 1 = enable blocking of all undervoltage elementswhen the measured voltage is below 15V (or 55V on440V relay)

When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until theconfirmation display appears and confirm the selection.

Next enter the time delay characteristic for each element.

Enter, or copy, the same settings into the UV/OV 2 column if it is active. It is notessential that the links are set the same in both setting groups. For example the 4Velement could be made available in group one and not in group two settings.

Note: It would be wise to check that an element that is to be switched out in thealternative setting group is reset before the alternative setting group is selected, oralternatively make a physical test to ensure there are no latch-up problems.

A different time characteristic can be selected for each element in the secondsetting group, but it is not advisable to select inverse in one group and definite timein the other if it is intended to dynamically switch between setting groups. If twodifferent characteristics are selected then the same register will be used for bothand these registers will not be reset to zero when the setting group is changedunless the voltage is below the set overvoltage, or above the set undervoltagethreshold.

Page 75: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 5 of 25

2.4 Under/overfrequency links (FF)

Select the FF links under the UF/OF 1 menu column heading and put the relay intosetting mode by pressing the [+] key. Step through the function links with the [F]key and set the links for the options required.

FF 0 1F Enable 1 = enable stage 1 under/overfrequency element

FF 1 1F Under 1 = stage 1 set for underfrequency protection

0 = stage 1 set for overfrequency protection

FF 2 2F Enable 1 = enable stage 2 under/overfrequency element

FF 3 2F Under 1 = stage 2 set for underfrequency protection

0 = stage 2 set for overfrequency protection

FF 4 3F Enable 1 = enable stage 3 under/overfrequency element

FF 5 3F Under 1 = stage 3 set for underfrequency protection

0 = stage 3 set for overfrequency protection

FF 6 4F Enable 1 = enable stage 4 under/overfrequency element

FF 7 4F Under 1 = stage 4 set for underfrequency protection

0 = stage 4 set for overfrequency protection

When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until theconfirmation display appears and confirm the selection.

Next enter the time delay for each element.

Enter, or copy, the same settings into the UF/OF 2 column if it is active. It is notessential that the links are set the same in both setting groups. For example the 2Felement could be made available in group one and not in group two settings.

Note: It would be wise to check that an element that is to be switched out in thealternative setting group is reset before the alternative setting group isselected, or alternatively make a physical test to ensure there are no latch-up problems.

2.5 Negative sequence links (NS)

Select the column NEG SEQ 1 and NS links. Press the [+] key to put the relay intosetting mode and set the links to “1” that enable the required options available vialinks NS0 to NS2.

NS 0 1V2 1 = enable stage 1 negative sequence overvoltage

NS 1 2V2 1 = enable stage 2 negative sequence overvoltage

NS 2 V2 Block 1 = block CB close pulse if negative sequence voltageis greater than V2 Cl Bl setting

If the KVFG 122 is being used, with system data link SDA set to 1, this selectsneutral displacement measurement mode. As such the negative sequenceovervoltage protection will not be available.

When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until theconfirmation display appears and then confirm the selection.

Next enter the time delay characteristics for the enabled elements.

Page 76: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 6 of 25

Enter, or copy, the same settings into the NEG SEQ 2 column if it is active. It is notessential that the links are set the same in both setting groups. For example the2V2 element could be made available in group one and not in group two settings.

Note: It would be wise to ensure the logic is such that an element that is to beswitched out in the alternative setting group is reset before the alternativesetting group is selected, or alternatively make a physical test to ensurethere are no latch-up problems.

A different time characteristic can be selected for each element in the secondsetting group, but it is not advisable to select inverse in one group and definite timein the other if it is intended to dynamically switch between setting groups.If different characteristics are selected then the same register will be used for both.These registers are not reset to zero when the setting group is changed unless thevoltage falls below the set threshold.

2.6 Logic links (LOG)

The logic links under the LOGIC menu column heading customise the auxiliaryfunctions of the relay. Put the relay into setting mode by pressing the [+] key.Step through the function links with the [F] key and set the links for the optionsrequired.

LOG 0 Not used

LOG 1 Not used

LOG 2 Not used

LOG 3 Aux2 = DPU 1 = enable tAUX2 as a delay on pick-up timer

0 = enable tAUX2 as a delay on drop-off timer

LOG 4 Not used

LOG 5 Aux3 = DPU 1 = enable tAUX3 as a delay on pick-up timer

0 = enable tAUX3 as a delay on drop-off timer

LOG 6 Rly 7 Flags 1 = enable RL7 to latch flags, generate fault recordsand CB maintenance data

LOG 7 CB Rec 1 = enable CB operations register to be incremented

When the selection has been completed continue to press the [F] key until theconfirmation display appears and confirm the selection.

Set the circuit breaker close and trip pulse time delays tCLOSE and tTRIP.

Select the default display that appears on start-up.

Page 77: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 7 of 25

Section 3. NEUTRAL DISPLACEMENT (RESIDUALOVERVOLTAGE) PROTECTION

3.1 Application

On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase toearth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balancedvectors at 120º to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on theprimary system this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is produced.This could be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltagetransformer having a “broken delta” secondary connection. Hence, a residualvoltage measuring relay can be used to offer earth fault protection on such asystem. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect toearth which is commonly referred to as “neutral voltage displacement” or NVD.

Figures 1a and 1b show the residual voltages that are produced during earth faultconditions occurring on a solid and impedance earthed power systemrespectively:-

Figure 1a. Residual voltage measured on a solidly earthed system

VA

VBVC

VA

VBVC VBVC

VA

VB

VC

VRES VB

VC

VAVB

VC

VRES

ZS ZL

A–G

FRSE

RESIDUAL VOLTAGE AT R (RELAYING POINT)DEPENDANT UPON ZS/ZL RATIO.

VRES = X 3 EZSO

2ZS1 + + +ZSO ZLO2ZL1

Page 78: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 8 of 25

Figure 1b. Residual voltage measured on an impedance earthed system

As can be seen in Fig. 1a, the residual voltage measured by a relay for an earthfault on a solidly earthed system is solely dependent upon the ratio of sourceimpedance behind the relay to line impedance in front of the relay, up to the pointof fault. For a remote fault, the Zs/Zl ratio will be small, resulting in acorrespondingly small residual voltage. As such, depending upon the relay setting,such a relay would only operate for faults up to a certain distance along thesystem. The value of residual voltage generated for an earth fault condition isgiven by the general formula shown in Figure 1a.

Figure 1b shows that a resistance earthed system will always generate a relativelylarge degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance nowincludes the earthing impedance. It follows then, that the residual voltagegenerated by an earth fault on an insulated system will be the highest possiblevalue (3 x phase-neutral voltage), as the zero sequence source impedance isinfinite.

From the previous information it can be seen that the detection of a residualovervoltage condition is an alternative means of earth fault detection, which does

ZS ZL

FRSE

VRES = X 3 EZSO + 3ZE

2ZS1 + + +ZSO ZLO2ZL1 + 3ZE

VA–GS

G,F

VC–G VB–G

RS

G,F

VC–G VB–G

R

N

G

ZE

VA–GS

G,F

VC–G VB–G

VRES

VA–G

VB–G

VC–G

VRES

VA–G

VB–G

VC–G

VRES

VB–G

VC–G

A–G

Page 79: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 9 of 25

not require any measurement of current. This may be particularly advantageous inhigh impedance earthed or insulated systems, where the provision of core balanceCTs on each feeder may be either impractical, or uneconomic.

It must be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied, such avoltage will be generated for a fault occurring anywhere on that section of thesystem and hence the NVD protection must co-ordinate with other earth faultprotections.

The NVD element within the KVFG relays is of a three stage design, each stagehaving separate voltage and time delay settings. Each stage may be set to operateon either an IDMT or DT characteristic.

Note: On the KVFG122, with system data link SDA = 0, the neutral voltagedisplacement protection elements are disabled.

Figure 2. Neutral voltage displacement protection logic

Multiple stages are included for the NVD protection to account for applicationswhich require both alarm and trip stages; for example, an insulated system. It iscommon in such a case for the system to have been designed to withstand theassociated healthy phase overvoltages for a number of hours following an earthfault. In such applications, an alarm is generated soon after the condition isdetected, which serves to indicate the presence of an earth fault on the system.This gives time for system operators to locate and isolate the fault. Subsequentstages of the protection can issue a trip signal if the fault condition persists.

The KVFG relays each have a separate voltage input for measurement of theresidual voltage. The KVFG142 relay can if required, internally derive the residualvoltage from the 3 phase voltage inputs which must be supplied from either a5-limb or three single phase VT’s. These types of VT design allow the passage ofresidual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residualvoltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limbVT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay forthis application.

The output of the broken delta winding will predominantly be at the fundamentalfrequency. However, it will also contain other in-phase components (triplenharmonics) which will be filtered by the combination of anti-aliasing and Fourierfilters (refer to Chapter 7, Section 1.15 concerning the frequency response).From this point of view, apart from the fundamental frequency signal, the mostprevalent harmonic will be the 3rd harmonic, for which the KVFG provides arejection ratio greater than 20:1.

ND001

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0& 1tVo

OD01 Blk 1tVo

1Vo

OE01 1tVo

ND101

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0& 21tVo

OD02 Blk 2tVo

2Vo

OE02 2tVo

ND201

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0& 3tVo

OD03 Blk 3tVo

3Vo

OE03 3tVo

Page 80: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 10 of 25

3.2 Voltage settings

The following table details the NVD voltage settings;

Symbol Min Max StepVoltage Threshold Stage 1(Vn =100/120V) 1Vo 1V 100V 1VVoltage Threshold Stage 2(Vn =100/120V) 2Vo 1V 100V 1VVoltage Threshold Stage 3(Vn =100/120V) 3Vo 1V 100V 1VVoltage Threshold Stage 1(Vn = 415/440V) 1Vo 4V 400V 4VVoltage Threshold Stage 2(Vn = 415/440V) 2Vo 4V 400V 4VVoltage Threshold Stage 3(Vn = 415/440) 3Vo 4V 400V 4V

Although all settings refer to the neutral voltage displacement protection in terms ofVo, it should be considered that the measured voltage and hence any displayedand set figures are residual voltages. In order to know the actual zero sequencevoltage value, the values being measured should be divided by 3, since themagnitude of residual voltage is equivalent to three time the zero sequence voltagemagnitude.

On KVFG 142 relays, there is the ability to calculate the residual voltage basedupon the phase-ground voltages connected to the relay. (Function link ND3 set to1). However, due to the measurement technique, this results in decreasingaccuracy below settings of 5V (20V on 440V versions), outside the normalaccuracy claims.

3.3 Definite time settings

Each stage can be selected to have a definite time characteristic. The operationtime will be the set time for the time delay, plus the operation time of the outputrelay and the time taken to detect the neutral displacement condition.

The same register is used for each time delay in both setting groups and the timeris not reset when switching from one setting group to the other. Thus switching froma setting group with a long time setting to that with a short time setting may resultin a trip if the shorter time setting had already elapsed.

Symbol Min Max Step

DT Setting Stage 1 1tVo 0 600s 0.01s – graded

DT Setting Stage 2 2tVo 0 600s 0.01s – graded

DT Setting Stage 3 3tVo 0 600s 0.01s – graded

Page 81: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 11 of 25

3.4 Inverse time curve settings

The IDMT characteristic available on each stage is defined by the followingformula:

t = K(M –1)

Where;K = Time multiplier setting (eg. Vo(tms), etc)

t = Operating time in seconds

M = Residual voltageSetting voltage

The related setting ranges are given in the table below:

Symbol Min Max Step

K Setting Stage 1 1Vo(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

K Setting Stage 2 2Vo(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

K Setting Stage 3 3Vo(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

3.5 Setting guidelines

The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude ofresidual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This inturn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may becalculated by using the formulae previously given in Figures 1a and 1b. It mustalso be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltagethat is present on the system.

Note that IDMT characteristics are selectable on each stage of NVD in order thatelements located at various points on the system may be time graded with oneanother.

Wherever possible, it should be ensured that a suitable voltage is connected to theKVFG relay for frequency tracking (no tracking is available from the residualvoltage inputs). If the relay does not have any suitable voltage connected, the relayis unable to track and the operational range of the NVD element with regard tofrequency is severly reduced. When tracking the system frequency, the NVDelement will function over the entire frequency range of 45 to 65Hz, whereaswithout tracking this is reduced to the set system frequency Fn±1Hz.

Section 4. UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

4.1 Application

Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons,some of which are outlined below:-

• Increased system loading. Generally, some corrective action would be taken byvoltage regulating equipment such as AVR’s or On Load Tap Changers, in orderto bring the system voltage back to it’s nominal value. If the regulatingequipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system voltage, then tripping bymeans of an undervoltage relay will be required following a suitable time delay.

Page 82: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 12 of 25

• Faults occurring on the power system result in a reduction in voltage of thephases involved in the fault. The proportion by which the voltage decreases isdirectly dependent upon the type of fault, method of system earthing and it’slocation with respect to the relaying point. Consequently, co-ordination withother voltage and current-based protection devices is essential in order toachieve correct discrimination.

• Complete loss of busbar voltage. This may occur due to fault conditions presenton the incomer or busbar itself, resulting in total isolation of the incoming powersupply. For this condition, it may be a requirement for each of the outgoingcircuits to be isolated, such that when supply voltage is restored, the load is notconnected. Hence, the automatic tripping of a feeder upon detection ofcomplete loss of voltage may be required. This may be achieved by a threephase undervoltage element.

• Where outgoing feeders from a busbar are supplying induction motor loads,excessive dips in the supply may cause the connected motors to stall, andshould be tripped for voltage reductions which last longer than a pre-determined time. Such undervoltage protection may be present in the protectivedevice on the motor feeder itself. However, if it is not, the inclusion of thisfunctionality within the feeder protection relay on the incomer may provebeneficial.

Undervoltage conditions are relatively common, as they are related to faultconditions etc. However, overvoltage conditions are also a possibility and aregenerally related to loss of load conditions as described below;

Under conditions of load rejection, the supply voltage will increase in magnitude.This situation would normally be rectified by voltage regulating equipment such asAVR’s or on-load tap changers. However, failure of this equipment to bring thesystem voltage back within prescribed limits leaves the system with an overvoltagecondition which must be cleared in order to preserve the life of the systeminsulation. Hence, overvoltage protection which is suitably time delayed to allowfor normal regulator action, may be applied.

During earth fault conditions on a power system there may be an increase in thehealthy phase voltages. Ideally, the system should be designed to withstand suchovervoltages for a defined period of time. Normally, there will be a primaryprotection element employed to detect the earth fault condition and to issue a tripcommand if the fault is uncleared after a nominal time. However, it would bepossible to use an overvoltage element as a back-up protection in this instance.A single stage of protection would be sufficient, having a definite time delay.

Page 83: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 13 of 25

Figure 3. Under and overvoltage protection logic

The under/overvoltage protection included within the KVFG relays consists of fourindependent stages which are configurable as either under or overvoltageprotection, using phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Each stage maybe selected as either IDMT or DT and outputs are available for either single orthree phase conditions.

Note: On the KVFG122, with system data link SDA = 1, the under/overvoltageprotection only gives an output signal on the A phase output contact. Nooutputs can be given for either B or C phases.

VF301

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0&

OD05 Blk 2tV

2V

OE07 2tVa(-b)VF40

VF40

1

1

&

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE08 2tVb(-c)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE09 2tVc(-a)

1

0

VF5

2tV

VF601

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0&

OD06 Blk 3tV

3V

OE0A 3tVa(-b)VF70

VF70

1

1

&

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE0B 3tVb(-c)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE0C 3tVc(-a)

1

0

VF8

3tV

VFA0

VF901

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0&

OD07 Blk 4tV

4V

OE0D 4tVa(-b)VFA0

1

1

&

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE0E 4tVb(-c)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE0F 4tVc(-a)

1

0

VFB

4tV

1OE06 1tVc(-a)

1

0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

VF001

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0&

OD04 Blk 1tV

1V

OE04 1tVa(-b)VF10

VF10

1

&

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE05 1tVb(-c)

VF2

1tV

FROM UNDERVOLTAGEBLOCKING LOGIC

1

1

1

1

Page 84: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 14 of 25

4.2 Voltage settings

The following table details the voltage settings for the under/overvoltage elements;

Symbol Min Max Step

Voltage Threshold Stage 1

(Vn = 100/120V) 1V 5V 200V 1V

Voltage Threshold Stage 2

(Vn = 100/120V) 2V 5V 200V 1V

Voltage Threshold Stage 3

(Vn = 100/120V) 3V 5V 200V 1V

Voltage Threshold Stage 4

(Vn = 100/120V) 4V 5V 200V 1V

Voltage Threshold Stage 1

(Vn = 415/440V) 1V 20V 800V 4V

Voltage Threshold Stage 2

(Vn = 415/440V) 2V 20V 800V 4V

Voltage Threshold Stage 3

(Vn = 415/440) 3V 20V 800V 4V

Voltage Threshold Stage 4

(Vn = 415/440) 4V 20V 800V 4V

4.3 Definite time settings

Each stage can be selected to have a definite time characteristic. The operationtime will be the set time for the time delay, plus the operation time of the outputrelay and the time taken to detect the under or overvoltage condition.

The same register is used for each time delay in both setting groups and the timeris not reset when switching from one setting group to the other. Thus switching froma setting group with a long time setting to that with a short time setting may resultin a trip if the shorter time setting had already elapsed.

Symbol Min Max Step

DT Setting Stage 1 1tV 0 100s 0.01s – graded

DT Setting Stage 2 2tV 0 100s 0.01s – graded

DT Setting Stage 3 3tV 0 100s 0.01s – graded

DT Setting Stage 4 4tV 0 100s 0.01s – graded

Page 85: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 15 of 25

4.4 Inverse time curve settings

The IDMT characteristic available on each stage is defined by the followingformula:

Where;

t = K|M –1|

Where;

K = Time multiplier setting (1V(tms), etc)

t = Operating time in seconds

M = Measured voltageSetting voltage

The related setting ranges are given in the table below:

Symbol Min Max Step

K Setting Stage 1 1V(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

K Setting Stage 2 2V(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

K Setting Stage 3 3V(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

K Setting Stage 4 4V(tms) 0.5 100 0.5

4.5 Undervoltage setting guidelines

In the majority of applications, undervoltage protection is not required to operateduring system earth fault conditions. If this is the case, the element should beselected in the menu to operate from a phase to phase voltage measurement, asthis quantity is less affected by single phase voltage depressions due to earthfaults.

The voltage threshold setting for the undervoltage protection should be set at somevalue below the voltage excursions which may be expected under normal systemoperating conditions. This threshold is dependent upon the system in question buttypical healthy system voltage excursions may be in the order of –10% of nominalvalue.

Similar comments apply with regard to a time setting for this element, ie. therequired time delay is dependent upon the time for which the system is able towithstand a depressed voltage. As mentioned earlier, if motor loads areconnected, then a typical time setting may be in the order of 0.5 seconds.

4.6 Overvoltage setting guidelines

The inclusion of the multiple voltage stages and their respective operatingcharacteristics allows for a number of possible applications;

• Use of the IDMT characteristic gives the option of a longer time delay if theovervoltage condition is only slight but results in a fast trip for a severeovervoltage. As the voltage settings for the stages are independent, a secondstage could then be set lower than the first to provide a time delayed alarmstage if required.

Page 86: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 16 of 25

• Alternatively, if preferred, multiple stages could be set to definite time andconfigured to provide the required alarm and trip stages.

• If only one stage of overvoltage protection is required, or if the element isrequired to provide an alarm only, the remaining stages may be disabled withinthe relay menu, or used for undervoltage applications.

This type of protection must be co-ordinated with any other overvoltage relays atother locations on the system. This should be carried out in a similar manner to thatused for grading current operated devices.

Section 5. UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY PROTECTION

5.1 Application

An underfrequency condition will occur when the power system load exceeds theavailable generated power, such as when a power system becomes split with loadleft connected to a set of ‘islanded’ generators that is in excess of their capacity.Such events could be compensated for by automatic load shedding making theunderfrequency a transient condition.

Load shedding can be achieved by either voltage reduction, or by disconnection oflow priority loads. The voltage reduction method is only effective where the loaddoes not contain a large percentage of motors. Under such situations, the drop involtage will cause the connected motors to draw more current in an attempt tomaintain their speed, which will further increase the loading on the alreadyoverloaded system. If uncontrolled, this could lead to a collapse of the system.

Disconnection of low priority loads is a more effective method of load reductionand can be performed based upon various voltage or frequency measurementmethods. A common method is underfrequency load shedding, whereby at specificlevels of frequency various sections of load would be disconnected. Multiple stagesof underfrequency detection could be used to segregate the loads into non-essential, essential and critical groupings thereby aiding in controlled plantoperation during abnormal conditions.

In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, a final stage ofunderfrequency protection should be provided to totally disconnect all loads.

Overfrequencies arise when the generation is in excess of the electrical load andlosses. The most common occurrence of overfrequency is after substantial loss ofload when a rise in generating running speed occurs. The generation controlequipment should quickly respond so that normal running speed is quicklyregained but overfrequency protection may be required as a backup protectionfunction to cater for failures.

The frequency protection included within the KVFG relays consists of fourindependent stages which are configurable as either under or overfrequencyelements.

Page 87: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 17 of 25

Figure 4. Under/overfrequency protection logic

Please note that the frequency protection will only function correctly when asuitable voltage signal is being presented to the relay. As such, no frequencyprotection should be used with only the residual voltage input connected, or whenthere is insufficient voltage to allow tracking. (Please see Section 7 onUndervoltage Blocking).

5.2 Frequency settings

The following table details the frequency settings for the under/overfrequencyelements;

Symbol Min Max Step

Frequency Threshold Stage 1 1F 46.00Hz 64.00Hz 0.01Hz

Frequency Threshold Stage 2 2F 46.00Hz 64.00Hz 0.01Hz

Frequency Threshold Stage 3 3F 46.00Hz 64.00Hz 0.01Hz

Frequency Threshold Stage 4 4F 46.00Hz 64.00Hz 0.01Hz

5.3 Definite time settings

Each stage has a definite time characteristic. The operation time will be the set timefor the time delay, plus the operation time of the output relay and the time taken todetect the under or overfrequency condition.

The same register is used for each time delay in both setting groups and the timeris not reset when switching from one setting group to the other. Thus switching froma setting group with a long time setting to that with a short time setting may resultin a trip if the shorter time setting had already elapsed.

FFO01

FF101 1F

& 1tF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE10 1tF7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ODO8 Blk 1tF

FF201

FF301 2F

& 2tF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE11 2tF7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ODO9 Blk 2tF

FF401

FF501 3F

& 3tF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE12 3tF7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ODOA Blk 3tF

FF601

FF701 4F

& 4tF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE13 4tF7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ODOB Blk 4tF

FROM UNDERVOLTAGEBLOCKING LOGIC

Page 88: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 18 of 25

Symbol Min Max Step

DT Setting Stage 1 1tF 0 100s 0.01s – gradedDT Setting Stage 2 2tF 0 100s 0.01s – gradedDT Setting Stage 3 3tF 0 100s 0.01s – gradedDT Setting Stage 4 4tF 0 100s 0.01s – graded

5.4 Setting guidlines

The frequency measuring elements use the inherent frequency tracking capabilitiesof the relay to provide a measurement. The requirement of this tracking feature isthat the element should be extremely stable and accurate (accuracy is better than±0.1%) but as a result this makes the element slow in comparison to othertechniques eg, zero crossing etc. Typically, operation of the frequency element willoccur in less than 200ms (not including any intentional time delay), but this willincrease as the deviation from setting decreases. Please view Appendix 4 wherethe typical operating times for the under and over frequency elements are shown,when no intentional delay is set.

5.4.1 Underfrequency setting guidelines

The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for thesystem are not exceeded.

On industrial sites it is now common for local loads and generation to be operatedin parallel with the local supply authority. In this situation, the KVFG could be usedto provide both local load shedding facilities and underfrequency protection, toallow disconnection of non-essential loads in an attempt to maintain the systemfrequency, prior to disconnection from the local authority. Typical settings could seeshedding of non-essential loads at –4% of system frequency, essential loads at –5%of system frequency and disconnection from the local authority at –6%. Anotherload shedding stage could also be implemented, at the expense of being able toprovide any over frequency protection.

Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the KVFG underfrequencyprotection should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that tripping will not occur inthe event of successful load shedding following a system overload. Two stages ofunderfrequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in Figure 5, to co-ordinatewith multi-stage system load-shedding.

Figure 5. Co-ordination of underfrequency protection

Frequency

fn

F1<

F2<

A

B

C

†2 †1 Time

Turbine prohibited area

A System frequency response withminimum load shed for recovery

B System frequency response withunder shedding of load

C Optimum underfrequencyprotection characteristic

Page 89: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 19 of 25

5.4.2 Overfrequency setting guidelines

The KVFG overfrequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal,transient over frequency excursions following full-load rejection. ie. allow time forthe generation control systems to recover from the situation. Depending upon theapplication of the relay, this could result in settings as high as +10% of systemfrequency for generator protection, or +1% of system frequency for disconnectingfrom local authority supplies.

Section 6. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGEPROTECTION

6.1 Application

Where an incoming feeder is supplying a switchboard which is feeding rotatingplant (eg. induction motors), correct phasing and balance of the ac supply isessential. Incorrect phase rotation will result in any connected motors rotating inthe wrong direction. For directionally sensitive applications, such as lifts andconveyor belts, it may be unacceptable to allow this to happen.

Any unbalanced condition occurring on the incoming supply will result in thepresence of negative phase sequence (nps) components of voltage. In the event ofincorrect phase rotation, the supply voltage would effectively consist of 100%negative phase sequence voltage only. By monitoring the input voltage rotationand magnitude (normally from a bus connected voltage transformer), interlockingcan be arranged with the motor contactor or circuit breaker to prevent the motorfrom being energised whilst incorrect phase rotation exists.

The negative sequence overvoltage protection included within the KVFG relaysconsists of two independent stages which may be selected as either IDMT or DT.A third threshold may also be set for preventing remote close commands (seeSection 8).

Figure 6. Negative sequence overvoltage protection logic

Note: On the KVFG 122, with system data link SDA = 1, the negative sequencevoltage measurement, protection and blocking elements are disabled.

1V2 & 1tV2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE14 1tV27 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ODOC Blk 1tV2NSO

01

2V2 & 2tV2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE15 2tV27 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ODOD Blk 2tV2NS1

01

Page 90: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 20 of 25

6.2 Voltage settings

The following table details the voltage settings for the negative sequenceovervoltage elements;

Symbol Min Max Step

Voltage Threshold Stage 1(Vn = 100/120V) 1V2 5V 150V 1V

Voltage Threshold Stage 2(Vn = 100/120V) 2V2 5V 150V 1V

Voltage Threshold Stage 1(Vn = 415/440V) 1V2 20V 600V 4V

Voltage Threshold Stage 2(Vn = 415/440V) 2V2 20V 600V 4V

The negative sequence is based upon a calculation using the phase-phase voltagesapplied to the relay. Due to this measurement technique, the accuracy belowsettings of 15V (60V on 440V versions) on the KVFG 122 and 5V (20V on 440Vversions) on the KVFG 142 fall outside the normal accuracy claims.

6.3 Definite time settings

Each stage can be selected to have a definite time characteristic. The operationtime will be the set time for the time delay, plus the operation time of the outputrelay and the time taken to detect the under or overvoltage condition.

The same register is used for each time delay in both setting groups and the timeris not reset when switching from one setting group to the other. Thus switching froma setting group with a long time setting to that with a short time setting may resultin a trip if the shorter time setting had already elapsed.

Symbol Min Max Step

DT Setting Stage 1 1tV2 0.5 100s 0.01s – gradedDT Setting Stage 2 2tV2 0.5 100s 0.01s – graded

6.4 Inverse time curve settings

The IDMT characteristic available on each stage is defined by the followingformula:

t = K(M –1)

Where;K = Time multiplier setting (eg. V2(tms), etc)

t = Operating time in seconds

M = Measured negative sequence voltageNegative sequence setting voltage

The related setting ranges are given in the table below:

Symbol Min Max Step

K Setting Stage 1 1V2(tms) 0.5 100s 0.5K Setting Stage 2 2V2(tms) 0.5 100s 0.5

Page 91: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 21 of 25

6.5 Setting guidelines

As stated above, as the primary concern is normally the detection of incorrectphase rotation (rather than small unbalances), a sensitive setting is not usuallyrequired. In addition, it must be ensured that the setting is above any standing npsvoltage that may be present due to imbalances in the measuring VT, relaytolerances etc. A setting of approximately 15% of rated voltage may be typical.

Note that standing levels of nps voltage (V2) will be displayed in the measurementscolumn of the relay menu. Hence, if more sensitive settings are required, they maybe determined during the commissioning stage by viewing the actual level that ispresent.

Section 7. UNDERVOLTAGE BLOCKING

7.1 Blocking the undervoltage elements

Whenever the measured voltage falls below any undervoltage setting, the elementwill start to time and on completion of operation, given an output indication.For most applications this would be the required response, even when the VT isde-energised.

If the KVFG was connected to a line which was also provided with an auto-reclosescheme, during a transient fault the line would be initially de-energised and thensuccessfully reclosed to give normal voltage conditions. Often it is undesirable togive an undervoltage alarm during this period, and as such the undervoltageelements may be prevented from operating. This can be achieved by threemethods within the KVFG as can be seen in Figure 7.

7.1.1 Extended time delays

In order to prevent operation during the auto-reclose cycle, the time delayassociated with the undervoltage elements could be extended such that anundervoltage condition would have to persist for longer than the longest possibleauto-reclose cycle. However, this method would require the KVFG to have longtime delays which would give slow operation for genuine undervoltage conditionswhere auto-reclose would not be initiated.

7.1.2 CB auxiliary contact monitoring

An auxiliary contact (52b or normally closed) from the CB mechanism could beused to energise the blocking input associated with the undervoltage stage(s) sothat when the circuit breaker was open, the element was prevented from operating.This would prevent the relay element from being able to complete operation duringa line de-energisation condition.

7.1.3 Undervoltage blocking

By selection of voltage function link VFD = 1, the undervoltage elements can beblocked when the relay measures a voltage below a fixed figure in all measuredphases. This means that for a KVFG 142 all three measured phase or line voltageswould need to drop below 15V on a 110V rated relay (55V on a 415V ratedrelay). For a KVFG 122 operation would depend upon the selected mode ofoperation but the operation is similar, merely depending upon whether one or bothinputs must fall below the fixed threshold.

Page 92: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 22 of 25

Figure 7a. Undervoltage blocking logic (KVFG 122)

Figure 7b. Undervoltage blocking logic (KVFG 142)

It should be noted that the residual voltage inputs are not used within theundervoltage blocking check.

7.2 Blocking the frequency elements

As described in Section 1 of Chapter 3, the relay is capable of tracking voltageswith a fundamental frequency in the range of 45Hz – 65Hz. However, if thevoltage falls to a value such that accurate tracking could not occur, it isconceivable that the frequency elements could maloperate. This is of particularrelevance during line energisation and de-energisation when significant distortionof the waveforms can be experienced. To prevent any possibility of mal-indication,the frequency elements are all blocked by the same undervoltage blockingelements described in Section 7.1.3 above, and shown in Figure 7. This internallogic provides a blocking signal to the frequency elements, regardless of whetherthey are set as under or overfrequency.

All the frequency elements can also be blocked via the opto-isolated inputs,provided appropriate input mask settings have been made.

VFD01

SDA0

1

Va(–b)<

Vb(–c)<

TO VOLTAGEELEMENTS

TO FREQUENCYELEMENTS&

VFD01

Va(–b)<

Vb(–c)<

Vc(–a)<

&

TO VOLTAGEELEMENTS

TO FREQUENCYELEMENTS

Page 93: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 23 of 25

Section 8. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE BLOCKING

As discussed in Section 6, when supplying directionally sensitive motors it shouldbe ensured that correct phase rotation is applied to the motor terminals. Even ifcorrect phase rotation is applied, a small amount of unbalance can cause rapidheating of the motor due to higher frequency components of current being induced.Normally, the motor protection relay would account for these factors and take anyprecautionary action to prevent closure of the incoming supply onto the motorterminals.

The KVFG relays can provide monitoring of the negative phase voltages which willbe present during unbalance, or when incorrect phase rotation occurs.The negative sequence overvoltage protection elements could then be arranged toprevent closure of the supply onto the motor via external scheme wiring.Alternatively, closure of the circuit breaker or contactor could be controlled via theKVFG circuit breaker control logic. By this method both local and remote closurecommands could be prevented if the amount of negative sequence voltageexceeded the V2 Cl Bl setting. This would require function links NS2 and SD9 bothto be set equal to 1 as may be seen in Figure 8.

Figure 8. CB control logic including blocking signals

1

ODOE L Trip

ODOF L Close

OD1O Ext Trip

SD2

V2 Cl Bl

RLY 3

RLY 7

OE16 CB Trip

OE17 CB Close

tTRIP

tCLOSERESET

Trip Circuit Breaker

Close Circuit Breaker

GENERATE CIRCUIT BREAKERMAINTENANCE RECORDS

LATCH RED TRIP LEDLATCH FLAGS

GENERATE FAULT RECORD &COPY TO EVENT RECORDS

01

LOG601

NS201

SD901

1

1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1

Page 94: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 24 of 25

Section 9. AUXILIARY TIMERS

When the auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, and tAUX3 are not being used by theinternal logic of the relay they may be used as discrete time delay elements.Timer tAUX1 will start to time when a logic input assigned in the input masks isenergised. It will then energise an output relay assigned in the associated outputmasks after the set time has elapsed. Alternatively, it can be used to give a resetdelay for the disturbance recorder and trip flags (see Section 5 of Chapter5).

Timer tAUX2 and tAUX3 can be selected to either give a delay on pick-up action(as described for tAUX1 above) or delay on drop-off action. When selected asdelay on drop-off, the appropriate output will be energised for as long as the inputis energised. On input de-energisation, the timer will start to time and at the end ofthe set time delay, the output relay will de-energise and open the contact.

The time delay can be individually set for each of the auxiliary timers, and can beselected over the range of 0 seconds to 24 days. To aid setting, the step size isgraded so that as the operation time increases, the step size increases also.The initial step size is 0.01 seconds.

Figure 9. Auxiliary timers

OD11 Aux17 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SD501

SD801

Recorder Stopped

OD12 Aux27 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

LOG30

1

OE19 Aux27 6 5 4 3 2 1 0tAUX2

OD13 Aux37 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

LOG50

1

OE1A Aux37 6 5 4 3 2 1 0tAUX3

RESET TRIP FLAGS

RESETDISTURBANCERECORDERSD8

01 OE18 Aux1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

tAUX111

Page 95: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 4

Page 25 of 25

Section 10. SETTING GROUP SELECTION

The relay has two setting groups, both of which are visible as supplied. To makethe second group of settings invisible in the menu, set function link SD4 = 0 in theSYSTEM DATA column. The value of the group 2 settings is unimportant when linkSD4 = 0, because group 1 settings will be in use by default. The menu cell 000E,in the SYSTEM DATA column, is a read only cell that displays the setting group thatis in operation.

Figure 10. Setting group selection logic

10.1 Remote change of setting group

Link [SD3] must be set to “1” before the relay will respond to a remote commandto change the selected setting group. Because the command cannot be sustainedover the serial link a set/reset register is used to remember the remotely selectedsetting group. When link SD3 = 1, the set/reset register shall change to 0/1 inresponse to the respective commands <Set Group 1>/<Set Group 2> via the serialport. When the value of set/reset register is “0” then the group 1 settings shall bein operation and when its value is “1” the group 2 settings will be in operation.The state of this register is stored when the relay is powered down and restored onpower up.

When link SD3 = 0 the value of the set/reset register will no longer change inresponse to remote commands and will retain its last set state prior to settingSD3 = 0. When link SD3 = 0 the value of the cell cannot be changed via the serialport and the value of this register will have no effect on the setting group in use.

Note: If [SD4] = 0 then the group 2 settings will be hidden and group 1 will beactive by default.

10.2 Controlled change of setting group

Link SD4 must be set to “1” to make the second setting group active. Energising alogic input allocated in mask [0D14 Set Grp2] will select setting group 2.This logic input could be energised via the contacts of one of the output relays sothat the change of setting group will be in response to some protection function.

SD501

SD501

OD14 Set Grp27 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1Remote Set Grp2

Remote Set Grp1

SET

RESET

CHANGE TOSETTING GROUP 2

Page 96: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 97: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 5Measurement and Records

Page 98: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 99: AREVA KVFG R8559C

1. MEASURE 1 11.1 Voltage 11.1.1 KVFG 142 relay 11.1.2 KVFG 122 relay 11.2 Frequency 12. MEASURE 2 22.1 Positive and negative sequence voltage 22.2 Circuit breaker operations. 23. FAULT RECORDS 23.1 Fault data 23.1.1 Relay type KVFG 122 set to “Neutral displacement plus phase-neutral or

phase-phase mode” 23.1.2 Relay type KVFG 122 set to “Two phase to phase mode” 23.1.3 Relay Type KVFG 142 33.2 Generating fault records 33.3 Accessing fault records 33.4 Resetting fault records 44. EVENT RECORDS 44.1 Triggering event records 44.2 Time tagging of event records 44.3 Accessing and resetting event records 55. DISTURBANCE RECORDS 55.1 Recorder control 55.2 Recorder capture 65.3 Recorder post trigger 65.4 Recorder logic trigger 65.5 Recorder relay trigger 65.6 Notes on recorded times 75.7 Disturbance recorder reset options 76. CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE RECORDS 76.1 Circuit breaker operations counter 76.2 Circuit breaker maintenance alarm 87. ALARM RECORDS 87.1 Watchdog 87.2 Trip indication 87.3 Alarm indication 8

FIGURESFigure 1 Record initiation logic 3

Figure 2 Recorder reset 7

Figure 3 Circuit breaker alarm 7

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Contents

Page 100: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 101: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 1 of 8

Section 1. MEASURE 1

1.1 Voltage

Voltage is measured once per power frequency cycle and a Fourier filter is used toextract the fundamental component. The voltage measurements available aredependant on the KVFG model and operating mode.

1.1.1 KVFG 142 relay

The phase-neutral voltages are measured directly when the internal VTs are starconnected. The phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) are then stored in menu locations0208, 0209 and 020A. From the phase-neutral voltages the phase-phase voltagesare calculated (Vab, Vbc, Vca) and stored in menu locations 0205, 0206 and0207. The residual voltage (Vo), is measured directly from the Vo input and storedin menu location 020B when function link ND3=0. When function link ND3=1 theresidual voltage (Vo) is calculated by summing the three phase-neutral voltagestogether and storing the result in menu location 020B.

When the relay is connected in 2 phase-phase input mode the voltages stored inmenu locations 0208, 0209 and 020A (Va, Vb, Vc) are not true representations ofthe phase-neutral voltages as there is no ground reference. From these voltages thecorrect phase-phase voltage for all three phases is calculated (Vab, Vbc and Vca)and stored in menu locations 0205, 0206 and 0207 respectively. The residualvoltage can only be measured from a direct input when the relay is connected in 2phase-phase input mode as the calculated Vo obtained when ND3=1 will beincorrect.

1.1.2 KVFG 122 relay

When the relay is connected with 1 phase-neutral/phase-phase input and residualvoltage input (function link SDA has to be set to 1) the phase-phase voltage isstored in menu location 0205 labelled as Vab. When a phase-neutral voltage isbeing measured the function link VFC needs to be set to 1 so that the phase-neutralvoltage will be stored in the correct menu location 0208 labelled Va. The residualvoltage measurement (Vo) is stored in menu location 020B.

When the relay is connected with 2 phase-phase inputs (function link SDA has tobe set to 0), the phase-phase voltages Vab and Vbc are measured and stored inmenu locations 0205 and 0206. From these 2 measured phase-phase voltages thethird phase-phase quantity (Vca) is calculated and stored in menu location 0207.No residual voltage measurement is available in this mode.

1.2 Frequency

The sampling frequency of the analogue/digital converter is synchronised to thepower system frequency when there is a signal of sufficient strength to reliablymake a frequency measurement. In the absence of a signal to frequency track thesampling frequency defaults to the power frequency setting in menu cell 0009.

For protection functions the measured frequency defaults to the power frequencysetting when the voltage is zero. The displayed frequency measurement will alsobe the sampling frequency, but in this case it will read 0 when the frequencytracking stops.

Page 102: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 2 of 8

Section 2. MEASURE 2

2.1 Positive and negative sequence voltage

From 2 phase-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc) the positive and negative sequencevoltages (V1, V2) are calculated and stored in menu locations 0305 and 0306respectively. This measurement is not available on KVFG122 in 1 phase-phase/phase-neutral and residual voltage mode (function link SDA=1).

2.2 Circuit breaker operations.

The “Circuit Breaker Operations Counter” is incremented by 1 each time the circuitbreaker is operated (See Chapter 5 Section 6.1). The value of the counter is storedin menu cell location 0307 and can be reset to zero by pressing the [0] key for atleast 1 second.

Section 3. FAULT RECORDS

A full record is stored for each of the last five faults, with the new recordoverwriting the oldest. These records are stored in non volatile memory and areretained when the relay is powered down.

When the record opens the values of voltage are stored. The fault flags will belatched when the voltage falls below 15V on the 110V input version or 55V on the415V version or the initiating function resets.

Fault records are copied to the event recorder and stored with a time tag.

3.1 Fault data

Fault records contain different information depending on the relay type andapplication.

3.1.1 Relay type KVFG 122 set to “Neutral displacement plus phase-neutral or phase-phase mode”

The fault records contain the following data:

– Fault flags

– Residual voltage Vo

– Va or Vab depending on selection of function link VFC

– Frequency

3.1.2 Relay type KVFG 122 set to “Two phase to phase mode”:

The fault records contain the following data:

– Fault flags

– Phase to phase voltages

– Negative sequence voltage V2

– Frequency

Page 103: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 3 of 8

3.1.3 Relay Type KVFG 142:

The fault records contain the following data:

– Fault flags

– Residual voltage Vo

– Phase to ground and phase to phase voltages

– Negative sequence voltage V2

– Frequency

3.2 Generating fault records

Figure 1: Record initiation logic

Fault records are generated when output relay RLY3, or a logic input assigned inthe input mask [0A09 EXT TRIP], is energised. The fault flags will be latched andthe trip LED lit in response to these two inputs. The circuit breaker operations willbe incremented and the breaker fail protection initiated by either of these twoinputs.

Relay RLY7 is used for remote, or manual trip, and can be arranged to trigger thegeneration of fault records and increment circuit breaker operations by setting linkLOG6 = 1.

3.3 Accessing fault records

Fault records can be accessed by selecting [0101 Fault No Fn] in the [FLTRECORD] column menu. The fault number (Fn) denotes the record for the last faultand the record for previous faults can be selected by successive long presses of the[0] key. Fn-1 is the previous fault and Fn-2 is the one before that, etc.

The [0] key enables fault record selection with the cover in place on the relay, butfor remote selection, the usual change setting commands will give a quickerresponse. With the cover removed and menu cell [0101 Fault No Fn] displayed,the [+] and [–] keys can be used to change to the required record number.

ODOE L Trip

ODOF L Close

OD1O Ext Trip

SD2

LOG6

V2 Cl Bl

RLY 3

RLY 7

1

1

1

1

OE16 CB Trip

OE17 CB CloseCIRCUIT BREAKERCONTROL

FAULT RECORD& FLAG LATCHINITIATION

NS2 SD9

tTRIP

tCLOSERESET

Trip Circuit Breaker

Close Circuit Breaker

GENERATE CIRCUIT BREAKERMAINTENANCE RECORDS

LATCH RED TRIP LEDLATCH FLAGS

GENERATE FAULT RECORD &COPY TO EVENT RECORDS

Page 104: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 4 of 8

3.4 Resetting fault records

All five fault records can be cleared by selecting cell 0110, the last cell under faultrecords and pressing the [0] key for at least 1 second.

Note: If fault records are being viewed with ACCESS or PAS&T software; press thereturn key and then select the reset cell option to reset all five fault records.

Section 4. EVENT RECORDS

Fifty time tagged event records can be stored, after which the oldest record isoverwritten. They are stored in volatile memory and will be lost if the relay ispowered down. The event records can only be accessed via the serialcommunication port and PC software is available to support the automaticextraction and storing of these records.

The following items are recorded by the event recorder:

– Fault records including: fault flags and fault voltages.

– Setting changes made via the user interface on the front of the relay

– Logic events: status change of logic inputs and/or output relays

– Alarms: internal equipment alarms detected by self monitoring functions.

The number of full fault records that can be stored in events records can beincreased by setting link SD7=0 to inhibit storage of logic events.

4.1 Triggering event records

Event records are triggered automatically in response to the functions listed in theprevious section.

4.2 Time tagging of event records

The K Range relays do not have a real time clock. Instead, they each have a free-running 32-bit counter that increments every 1ms. When an event occurs, the valueof this millisecond counter is recorded (Ta) and stored in the event buffer.

When the event is extracted, the present value of the millisecond counter is alsosent in the message (Tb). The master station must record the actual time at which itreceived the event message (Tc). This is equivalent to Tb if we consider thetransmission time of the event over the communication network to be negligible.

It then calculates how long ago the event occurred by:

How long ago = (Tb – Ta) ms

Real time = (time message was received) – (how long ago it occurred)

= (Tc) – (Tb – Ta) ms

Time tagging is to a resolution of 1ms, the incrementation rate of the counter andremains valid for approximately 49 days. However, the crystal to control the timinghas a nominal accuracy of ±50 ppm, is not externally synchronised and has notemperature compensation. It can therefore introduce an error of ±1s in every 5.5hours.

The event recording was originally designed for use with automatic extractionprograms running on a personal computer (PC) when these timing errors would beinsignificant. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.6 for notes on recorded times, as theseapply equally to event records.

Page 105: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 5 of 8

4.3 Accessing and resetting event records

Event records cannot be viewed on the relay and can only be accessed via theserial communication port of the relay. A PC with suitable software, such as PAS&T,can automatically extract the records, display them on a screen, print them, orstore them to either a floppy disk or to the hard disk of the computer.

When a new record is generated the oldest event record is automaticallyoverwritten and the event flag set. The PAS&T software responds to this flag andextracts the record. When all records have been read, the event flag resets.

Section 5. DISTURBANCE RECORDS

The internal disturbance recorder has one channel allocated to each of themeasured analogue quantities (not calculated analogue values such as NegativeSequence Voltage V2); one to record the eight control inputs and one to record theeight relay outputs. As with the event recorder, when the buffer is full the oldestrecord is overwritten and records are deleted if the auxiliary supply to the relay isremoved. This ensures that when the buffer is read the contents will all be valid.

The disturbance recorder is stopped and the record frozen, a set time after aselected trigger has been activated. For example, a protection trip command couldbe the selected trigger and the delay would then set the duration of the trace afterthe fault.

Each sample has a time tag attached to it so that when the waveform isreconstituted it can be plotted at the correct point against the time scale, thusensuring that the time base is correct and independent of the frequency.

The KVFG relays measure eight samples per cycle, but the method of recordingallows the analysis program to perform with records that may have a differentsample rate.

The disturbance recorder may be triggered by several different methods dependenton the settings in the RECORDER column of the menu. However, the records haveto be read via the serial communication port and suitable additional software isrequired to reconstruct and display the waveforms. Only one complete record isstored and the recorder must be reset before another record can be captured.

5.1 Recorder control

This cell displays the state of the recorder :

a) RUNNING – recorder storing data (overwriting oldest data)

b) TRIGGERED – recorder stop delay triggered

c) STOPPED – recorder stopped and record ready for retrieval

When this cell is selected, manual control is possible and to achieve this the relaymust be put into the setting mode by pressing the [+] key. A flashing cursor willthen appear on the bottom line of the display at the left-hand side. The [+] key willthen select ‘running’ and the [–] key will select ‘triggered’. When the appropriatefunction has been selected the [F] key is pressed to accept the selection and theselected function will take effect when the [+] key is pressed to confirm theselection. To abort the selection at any stage, press the reset key [0].

Page 106: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 6 of 8

5.2 Recorder capture

The recorder can capture:

a) SAMPLES – the individual samples

b) MAGNITUDES – the Fourier derived amplitudes

c) PHASES – the Fourier derived phase angles

The relay has no electro-mechanical adjustments, all calibration is effected insoftware and all three of the above options are used in the calibration process.

For normal use as a fault recorder, SAMPLES will be the most useful.

However, for 60Hz systems there is less processing time available per cycle and ifall the protection functions have been activated the menu system, being the lowestpriority task, may appear very slow. To improve this the disturbance recordershould be stopped (triggered) via the menu. If records are still required at this timethen it is suggested that the recorder is set to record magnitudes rather thansamples because this will use less of the available processing time.

5.3 Recorder post trigger

The post trigger setting determines the length of the trace that occurs after the stoptrigger is received. This may be set to any value between 1 and 512 samples.When recording samples the total trace duration is 512/8 = 64 cycles becausethe interval between the samples is equivalent to one eighth of a cycle. However,the Fourier derived values are calculated once per cycle and so the total tracelength when recording these calculated phase or amplitude values is 512 cycles.

5.4 Recorder logic trigger

Any, or all, of the opto-isolated inputs may be used as the stop trigger and thetrigger may be taken from either the energisation or the de-energisation of theseinputs. The bottom line of the display for this cell will show a series of 16characters, each of which may be set to ‘1’ or ‘0’. A ‘1’ will select the input as atrigger and a ‘0’ will deselect it.

The selection is made using the instructions for the setting links in Chapter 3,Section 4.10. The opto-isolated input (L0 to L7) associated with each digit is shownon the top line of the display for the digit underlined by the cursor. A ‘+’ precedingit will indicate that the trigger will occur for energisation and a ‘ – ‘ will indicatethe trigger will occur for de-energisation.

Note: Only L0 to L2 opto-isolated inputs are available on a KVFG 122.

5.5 Recorder relay trigger

Any, or all, of the output relays may be used as a stop trigger and the trigger maybe taken from either the energisation or the de-energisation of these outputs. Thebottom line of the display for this cell will show a series of 16 characters, each ofwhich may be set to ‘1’ or ‘0’. A ‘1’ will select the input and a ‘0’ will deselect it.

The selection is made using the instructions for setting links in Chapter 3, Section4.10. The output relay (RLY0 to RLY7) associated with each digit underlined by thecursor is shown on the top line of the display. A ‘+’ preceding it will indicate thatthe trigger will occur for energisation and a ‘–’ will indicate the trigger will occurfor de-energisation.

Note: Only RLY0 to RLY3 output relays are available on a KVFG 122.

Page 107: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 7 of 8

5.6 Notes on recorded times

The times recorded for the opto-isolated inputs is the time at which the relayaccepted them as valid and responded to their selected control function. This willbe 12.5 ±2.5ms at 50Hz (10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz) after the opto-input wasenergised.

The time recorded for the output relays is the time at which the coil of the relay wasenergised and the contacts will close approximately 5ms later. Otherwise the timetags are generally to a resolution of 1ms for events and to a resolution of 1µs forthe samples values.

5.7 Disturbance recorder reset options

Figure 2: Recorder reset

The disturbance recorder is reset via cell [0F01 Control]. Alternatively it can bearranged to reset automatically after a time delay by setting function SD8=1 andthen tAUX1 can be set to the necessary reset delay. The setting range for tAUX1 is0 to 24 days in graduated steps with the smallest step of 10ms. With this optionthe recorder can be reset instantaneously by energising a logic input that isassigned in the input mask [0D11 Aux1].

Section 6. CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE RECORDS

Figure 3: Circuit breaker alarm

6.1 Circuit breaker operations counter

A register sums the number of circuit breaker operations and the value can beaccessed via menu cell 0310 under the column heading MEASURE 2. This recordis updated every time output relay RLY3 operates, or an opto input assigned ininput mask [0A09 Ext Trip] is energised by an external trip. If link LOG6=1 thenoperation of relay RLY7 will also be able to increment this register. RLY7 is normallyused for manual or remote trips via the trip pulse timer (tTRIP).

SD8

SD8

SD5

OD11 Aux1

RecorderStopped

1

1

tAUX1RecorderStopped

OE18 Aux1

RESET TRIP FLAGS

RESETDISTURBANCERECORDER

DISTURBANCERECORDERRESET

LOG7

CB(ops)

OE1E CB Alarm CIRCUITBREAKER ALARM

Page 108: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 5

Page 8 of 8

This function is inhibited if link LOG7=0 and operative if LOG7=1. Incrementationof this counter can be blocked during testing by setting link LOG7 = 0.

The value of the counter can be reset to zero when it is displayed, by pressing thereset key [0] for at least 1 second. Alternatively a reset cell command can be sentvia the serial communication port. These cells are password protected and cannotbe reset if the password has not been entered.

6.2 Circuit breaker maintenance alarm

A threshold can be set on the circuit breaker operations counter. The settings willbe found in menu cells [0C07 CB Ops>] under the LOGIC column heading.When the threshold is exceeded the output mask [0E1E CB Alarm] will beenergised and any relay assigned in this mask will pick-up to initiate an alarm.This is the only form of alarm that is generated, except for the change in state ofthe output relay, which may be recorded in the event records if link SD7=1.The alarm will be inhibited if link LOG7=0, or if the output relay is de-selected inthe relay mask.

Section 7. ALARM RECORDS

7.1 Watchdog

The watchdog relay will pick up when the relay is operational to indicate a healthystate, with its make contact closed. When an alarm condition is detected thatrequires some action to be taken, the watchdog relay will reset and its breakcontact will close to give an alarm.

7.2 Trip indication

The trip LED will be lit following a trip condition where output relay RLY3 hasoperated, or a logic input that has been assigned in input mask [0D10 EXT Trip]has been energised.

Relay RLY7 is generally reserved for remote trip initiation via the serialcommunication port. When link LOG6 = 1 and relay RLY7 is assigned in outputmask [0E16 CB Trip] the trip LED will be lit if relay RLY7 has operated. Relay RLY7can also be initiated for manual trips via the trip pulse timer (tTRIP) by assigning alogic input in mask [0D0E LTrip] to give a trip indication. When relay RLY7operates and link LOG6 = 1, the default display changes to the fault flag displayand a letter ‘R’ is displayed in the extreme right-hand position on the bottom line ofthe display to indicate a ‘remote trip’.

If link LOG6 =0 relay RLY7 can be freely assigned to any output function, withoutcreating a trip indication.

7.3 Alarm indication

The alarm LED will flash when the password has been entered. It will be lit andremain steady when an internal fault has been detected by its self test routine.

The alarm flags can then be accessed to determine the fault, provided the relay isstill able to perform this function. See Chapter 3, Section 6 for more information onalarm flags.

Page 109: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 6Serial Communications

Page 110: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 111: AREVA KVFG R8559C

1. COURIER LANGUAGE AND PROTOCOL 12. K-BUS 12.1 K-Bus transmission layer 22.2 K-Bus connections 22.3 Ancillary equipment 33. SOFTWARE SUPPORT 33.1 Courier Access 33.2 PAS&T 43.3 K-Graph 43.4 Courier-Comm 43.5 PC requirements 43.6 Modem requirements 54. DATA FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION 54.1 Relay address 54.2 Measured values 64.3 Status word 64.4 Plant status word 64.5 Control status word 74.6 Logic input status word 74.7 Output relay status word 74.8 Alarm indications 74.9 Event records 84.10 Notes on recorded times 84.11 Protection flags 94.12 Fault records 104.13 Disturbance records 105. SETTING CONTROL 105.1 Remote setting change 115.2 Remote control of setting group 116. REMOTE OPERATION OF OUTPUT RELAYS 117. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL 127.1 Remote control of circuit breaker 137.2 Local control of the circuit breaker 137.3 Safe manual closing of the circuit breaker 137.3.1 Closing the circuit breaker via the serial communication port 137.3.2 Closing the circuit breaker via a lead mounted push-button 137.3.3 Delayed manual closure of the circuit breaker 148. AIDS TO CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE 14

FIGURESFigure 1. Typical K-Bus connection diagram 2

Figure 2. Circuit breaker control logic 12

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Contents

Page 112: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 113: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 1 of 14

Section 1. COURIER LANGUAGE AND PROTOCOL

Serial communications are supported over K-Bus, a multi-drop network that readilyinterfaces to IEC 60870-5 FT1.2 standards. The language and protocol used forcommunication is Courier. It has been especially developed to enable genericmaster station programs to access many different types of relay without thecontinual need to modify the master station program for each relay type.The relays form a distributed data base and the master station polls the slave relaysfor any information required.

This includes:

Measured values

Menu text

Settings and setting limits

Fault records

Event records

Disturbance records

Plant status

Software is available to support both on-line and off-line setting changes to bemade and the automatic extraction and storage of event and disturbance recordsas described in Section 3.

Courier is designed to operate using a polled system, which prevents a slavedevice from communicating directly to a master control unit when it needs to informit that something has happened; it must wait until the master control unit requeststhe information. A feature of Courier is that each piece of information is packetedby preceding it with a ‘data type and length’ code. By knowing the format of thedata the receiving device can interpret it.

The Courier Communication Manual describes various aspects of this languageand other communication information necessary to interface these devices to otherequipment. It gives details on the hardware and software interfaces as well asguidelines on how additional devices should implement the Courier language soas to be consistent with all other devices.

Section 2. K-BUS

K-Bus is a communication system developed to connect remote slave devices to acentral master control unit, thus allowing remote control and monitoring functions tobe performed using an appropriate communication language. It is not designed toallow direct communication between slave devices, but merely between a mastercontrol unit and several slave devices. The main features of K-Bus are:

• cost effectiveness

• high security

• ease of installation

• ease of use.

Page 114: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 2 of 14

K-BusScreened 2 core cable

5654

1

Each relay in the K Range has a serial communication port configured to K-Busstandards. K-Bus is a communication interface and protocol designed to meet therequirements of communication with protective relays and transducers within thepower system substation environment. It has the same reliability as the protectiverelays themselves and does not result in their performance being degraded in anyway. Error checking and noise rejection have been of major importance in itsdesign.

2.1 K-Bus transmission layer

The communication port is based on RS485 voltage transmission and receptionlevels with galvanic isolation provided by a transformer. A polled protocol is usedand no relay unit is allowed to transmit unless it receives a valid message,addressed to it without any detected error. Transmission is synchronous over a pairof screened wires and the data is FM0 coded with the clock signal to remove anydc component so that the signal will pass through transformers.

With the exception of the master units, each node in the network is passive andany failed unit on the system will not interfere with communication to the otherunits. The frame format is HDLC and the data rate is 64kbits/s.

2.2 K-Bus connections

Connection to the K-Bus port is by standard Midos 4mm screw terminals or snap-onconnectors. A twisted pair of wires is all that is required; the polarity of connectionis not important. It is recommended that an outer screen is used with an earthconnected to the screen at the master station end only. Termination of the screen iseffected with the “U” shaped terminal supplied and which has to be secured with aself tapping screw in the hole in the terminal block just below terminal 56, as

Figure 1. Typical K-Bus connection diagram

Page 115: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 3 of 14

shown in the diagram. Operation has been tested up to 32 units connected along1,000 metres of cable. The specification for suitable cable will be found in thetechnical data section. The method of encoding the data results in the polarity ofthe connection to the bus wiring being unimportant.

Note: K-Bus must be terminated with a 150Ω resistor at each end of the bus.The master station can be located at any position, but the bus should onlybe driven from one unit at a time.

2.3 Ancillary equipment

The minimum requirement to communicate with the relay is a K-Bus/IEC 60870-5converter box type KITZ and suitable software to run on an IBM or compatiblepersonal computer.

RS232 interconnection lead for connecting the KITZ to a personal computer (PC)and software as described in Section 3.

Section 3. SOFTWARE SUPPORT

3.1 Courier Access

The Courier Access program is supplied with each KITZ and it allows on-lineaccess to any relay or other slave device on the system. It polls all availableaddresses on the bus to build a list of the active relays. Each relay can beprogrammed with a product description (16 characters) and a plant reference(16 characters).

A particular relay may then be chosen and accessed to display a table listing themenu column headings. Selecting a heading from the list and pressing the returnkey of the computer returns the full page of data that has been selected.

Selecting a setting from the displayed page and pressing the return key again willbring up the setting change box displaying the current setting value and themaximum and minimum limits of setting that have been extracted from the relay.

A new setting may be typed in and entered. The new value will be sent to the relayand the relay will send back a copy of the data it received. If the returned valuematches what was sent, it is judged to have been received correctly and thedisplay asks for confirmation that the new setting is to be entered. When theexecution command is issued the relay checks the setting is within limits, stores it,then replies to state if the new value has been accepted, or rejected.

If the setting selected is password protected, the relay will reply that access isdenied. Any data received in error is automatically resent. Any data notunderstood, but received without error is ignored.

A complete setting file can be extracted from the relay and stored on disc andprinted out for record purposes. The stored settings can also be copied to otherrelays.

Control commands, such as close/trip of a circuit breaker, are actioned in thesame way as setting changes and can be achieved with this program by using thesetting change mechanism. This program supports modem connection but it cannotextract event or disturbance records.

Page 116: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 4 of 14

3.2 PAS&T

The Protection Access Software and Toolkit (PAS&T) program performs all thefunctions described for the Courier Access program, but additionally it can performthe following functions:

– Generate a table of all circuit breakers that can be controlled via the relaysconnected to K-Bus. These are listed by their plant reference and their open/closed status is displayed. Selecting a circuit breaker from this table enables itto be controlled with all the background security described for setting changes.

– Automatically extracts event records, displays them on screen, prints, or storesthem to disc.

– Automatically extracts disturbance records and stores them to disc inCOMTRADE format.

– Poll the relay for selected data at set intervals and displays the values on screen,or stores a selected number of values that it can plot on screen to show trendinformation.

– Display coded or decoded messages on screen to help de-bug thecommunication system.

– The auto-addressing feature allocates the next available address on the bus to anew relay.

3.3 K-Graph

This program, supplied with PAS&T, can display disturbance records and printthem. The COMTRADE format in which the files are stored can also be loaded intoan Excel, or similar spreadsheet program.

3.4 Courier-Comm

Courier-Comm is a Windows based setting program that can be used off-line,

ie. without the relays being connected. Setting files can be generated in the officeand taken to site on floppy disc for loading to the relays. This program can beused to down-load the settings to the relay, alternatively ACCESS or PAS&T may beused.

3.5 PC requirements

To operate fully, the above programs require:

IBM PC/XT/AT/PS2 or true compatible.

640kB of main memory RAM

Graphics adapter CGA, EGA, VGA or MDA

Serial adapter port configured as COM1 or COM2 (RS232)

Floppy disk drive 3.5 inch

MS-DOS 3.2 or later/IBM PC-DOS 3.2 or later

Parallel printer port for optional printer.

Additional equipment

Printer

RS-232 link.

Page 117: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 5 of 14

KITZ 101 K-Bus/ RS232 communication interface.

Modem

3.6 Modem requirements

The IEC 60870-5 ft1.2 frame format for transmitting the Courier communicationlanguage over RS-232 based systems, which includes transmission over modems,has been adopted.

The IEC 60870-5 ft1.2 specification calls for an 11-bit frame format consisting of 1start bit, 8 data bits, 1 even parity bit and 1 stop bit. However, most modemscannot support this 11-bit frame format, so a relaxed 10-bit frame format issupported by the Protection Access Software & Toolkit and by the KITZ, consistingof 1 start bit 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.

Although Courier and IEC 60870 both have inherent error detection, the paritychecking on each individual character in the 11-bit frame provides additionalsecurity and is a requirement of IEC 60870 in order to meet the error rate levels itguarantees. It is therefore recommended that modems should be used whichsupport these 11-bit frames.

The following modem has been evaluated for use with the full IEC 60870 ft1.2protocol and is recommended for use:

Motorola Codex 3265 or 3265 Fast

Other modems may be used provided that the following features are available;refer to the modem documentation for details on setting these features:

– Support for an 11 bit frame (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 even parity bit and 1 stopbit). This feature is not required if the 10-bit frame format is chosen.

– Facility to disable all error correction, data compression, speed buffering orautomatic speed changes.

– It must be possible to save all the settings required to achieve a connection innon-volatile memory. This feature is only required for modems at the outstationend of the link.

Notes: 1. The V23 asymmetric data rate (1200/75bits/s) is not supported.

2. Modems made by Hayes do not support 11 bit characters.

Section 4. DATA FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION

4.1 Relay address

The relay can have any address from 1 to 254 inclusive. Address 255 is theglobal address that all relays, or other slave devices, respond to. The Courierprotocol specifies that no reply shall be issued by a slave device in response to aglobal message. This is to prevent all devices responding and causing contentionon the bus.

Each relay is supplied with its address set to 255 to ensure that when connected toan operational network it will not have a conflicting address with another devicethat is already operational. To make the new device fully operational it must haveits address set. The address can be changed manually by entering the passwordand changing the address by the setting change method via the user interface onthe front of the relay.

Page 118: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 6 of 14

Alternatively, if the software running on the PC supports auto-addressing, the relayaddress can be set to 0 and the auto-addressing feature of the PC software turnedon. The relay will then be automatically set to the next available address on thebus. PAS&T software supports both these features.

If the address is 255, or unknown, the device address can be changed by sendinga new address, in a global message, to a device with a particular serial number.This method (supported by PAS&T, Courier Access and Courier-Comm) is useful fordevices that are not provided with a user interface with which to read or changethe current address.

4.2 Measured values

Any measured value can be extracted periodically by polling the relay.

4.3 Status word

A status byte is contained in every reply from a slave device. This is returned bythe relay at the start of every message to signal important data on which themaster station may be designed to respond automatically.

The flags contained are:

Bit 0 – 1 = Disturbance record available for collection

Bit 1 – 1 = Plant status word changed

Bit 2 – 1 = Control status word changed

Bit 3 – 1 = Relay busy, cannot complete reply in time

Bit 4 – 1 = Relay out of service

Bit 5 – 1 = Event record available for retrieval

Bit 6 – 1 = Alarm LED lit

Bit 7 – 1 = Trip LED lit

Bits 6 and 7 are used to mimic the trip and alarm indication on the frontplate ofthe slave devices. They cannot be used to extract fault and alarm information froma slave device because they cannot be guaranteed to be set for a long enoughperiod to be identified.

Bits 5 and 0 enable the master station to respond automatically and extract eventrecords and disturbance records, if they are so programmed.

4.4 Plant status word

The plant status word can be found at menu location 000C and each pair of bitsin the plant status word is used to indicate the status (position) of items of plantcontrolled via the relay.

Only the circuit breaker can be controlled via the relays described in this servicemanual and the associated bits in the plant status word are defined as follows:

Bit 1 Bit 0 – Circuit breaker 10 0 – No CB connected (auxiliary CB1 contacts faulty)0 1 – CB1 open1 0 – CB1 closed1 1 – Auxiliary CB1 contacts or wiring faulty

Page 119: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 7 of 14

Bit 8 Bit 9 – Circuit breaker 20 0 – No CB connected (auxiliary CB2 contacts faulty)0 1 – CB2 open1 0 – CB2 closed1 1 – Auxiliary CB2 contacts or wiring faulty

The master PAS&T control unit software makes use of this information to generate atable of all the circuit breakers and isolators that can be controlled and to showtheir current status.

To make this information available to the master control unit it is necessary toallocate a logic input that will be energised when the circuit breaker is closed ininput mask [0D15 CB Closed] and one that is energised when the circuit breaker isopen in input mask [0D16 CB Open]. Bits 0 and 1 will then indicate the positionof the circuit breaker.

If the circuit breaker can be racked into one of two positions, such that it can beconnected to busbar 1 or busbar 2, then a third logic input that will be energisedwhen the circuit breaker is connected to busbar 2 must be assigned in the inputmask [0D17 Bus2]. The circuit breaker open/closed states will then be transferredto bits 8 and 9 when the circuit breaker is in position for connecting the feeder tobusbar 2. The circuit breaker can then be controlled with the appropriate openand close commands.

4.5 Control status word

The control status word will be found in menu cell 000D. It is used to transfercontrol information from the slave device to the master control unit. However, theKVFG is a protection relay and this feature is not used.

4.6 Logic input status word

The status of the logic control inputs can be observed by polling menu cell 0020,where the lowest 8 bits of the returned value indicates the status of each of the 8logic inputs. This cell is read only.

4.7 Output relay status word

The status of the output relays can be observed by polling menu cell 0021, wherethe lowest 8 bits of the returned value indicates the status of each of the 8 outputrelays. This cell is read only.

4.8 Alarm indications

The status of the internal alarms produced by the relays self test routine can beobserved by polling menu cell 0022, where the lowest 7 bits of the returned valueindicate the status of each of the alarms. Bit 6 can be set/reset, in order to test thewatchdog relay. No other control actions are possible on this cell.

Bit 0 Error in factory configuration detected (relay inoperative)Bit 1 Error in calibration detected (relay running in uncalibrated state)Bit 2 Error detected in storage settings (relay operational, check settings)Bit 3 No service (protection out of service)Bit 4 No samples (A/D converter not sampling)Bit 5 No Fourier (Fourier routine not being performed)Bit 6 Test watchdog (set to 1 to test and rest to 0 afterwards)

Page 120: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 8 of 14

4.9 Event records

An event may be a change of state of a control input or an output relay. It may bea setting that has been changed locally or a protection or control function that hasperformed its intended function. A total of 50 events may be stored in a buffer,each with an associated time tag. This time tag is the value of a timer counter thatis incremented every 1ms.

The fault flags are displayed in the extracted event records as shown in thisexample.

Numbers = corresponding stage operated

. = corresponding stage not operated

The event records can only be accessed via the serial communication port whenthe relay is connected to a suitable master station. When the relay is not connectedto a master station the event records can still be extracted within certain limitations:

– The event records can only be read via the serial communication port and aK-Bus/IEC 60870-5 interface unit will be required to enable the serial port to beconnected to an IBM or compatible PC. Suitable software will be required to runon the PC so that the records can be extracted.

– When the event buffer becomes full the oldest record is overwritten by the nextevent.

– Records are deleted when the auxiliary supply to the relay is removed, to ensurethat the buffer does not contain invalid data. Dual powered relays are mostlikely to be affected.

– The time tag will be valid for 49 days assuming that the auxiliary supply has notbeen lost within that time. However, there may be an error of ±4.3s in every 24hour period due to the accuracy limits of the crystal. This is not a problem whena master station is on line as the relays will usually be polled once every secondor so.

The contents of the event record are documented in Chapter 5, Section 5.

4.10 Notes on recorded times

As described in Chapter 5, Section 5.2, the event records are appended with thevalue of a 1 millisecond counter and the current value of the counter is appendedto the start of each reply from a relay. Thus it is possible to calculate how long agothe event took place and subtract this from the current value of the real time clockin the PC.

If transmission is to be over a modem there will be additional delays in thecommunication path. In which case the KITZ can be selected to append the realtime at which the message was sent and this value can then be used in theconversion of the time tags. With this method of time tagging, the time tags for allrelays on K-Bus will be accurate, relative to each other, regardless of the accuracyof the relay time clock.

1 1 2 3 . 1 2 3 . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3 . 1 2 3 1 . .

Settinggroup

Va/Vab

Vb/Vbc

V2

RT remotetripping

Frequency

Vc/Vca

Vo

Auxiliarytimers

1 S/S VT REF 04 Jun 1998 12:14:07.880

Page 121: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 9 of 14

See also Chapter 5, Section 6.6 for additional information on time taggingaccuracy.

4.11 Protection flags

The protection flags hold the status of the various protection elements in the relayand it is from these that the fault flags are generated. They are transmitted in theevent records as part of a fault record and this is the only way they can beaccessed.

The following table lists the protection flags:

Bit HexadecimalMask Protection Function

0 0x00000001L A-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 1 Element Tripped

1 0x00000002L B-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 1 Element Tripped

2 0x00000004L C-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 1 Element Tripped

3 0x00000008L Under/Overfrequency Stage 1 Element Tripped

4 0x00000010L A-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 2 Element Tripped

5 0x00000020L B-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 2 Element Tripped

6 0x00000040L C-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 2 Element Tripped

7 0x00000080L Under/Overfrequency Stage 2 Element Tripped

8 0x00000100L A-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 3 Element Tripped

9 0x00000200L B-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 3 Element Tripped

10 0x00000400L C-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 3 Element Tripped

11 0x00000800L Under/Overfrequency Stage 3 Element Tripped

12 0x00001000L A-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 4 Element Tripped

13 0x00002000L B-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 4 Element Tripped

14 0x00004000L C-Phase Under/Overvoltage Stage 4 Element Tripped

15 0x00008000L Under/Overfrequency Stage 4 Element Tripped

16 0x00010000L Neutral Voltage Displacement Stage 1 Element Tripped

17 0x00020000L Neutral Voltage Displacement Stage 2 Element Tripped

18 0x00040000L Neutral Voltage Displacement Stage 3 Element Tripped

19 0x00080000L Negative Sequence Overvoltage Stage 1 Element Tripped

20 0x00100000L Negative Sequence Overvoltage Stage 2 Element Tripped

21 0x00200000L –

22 0x00400000L Under Voltage Element Tripped

23 0x00800000L Manual/Remote Trip in Progress

24 0x01000000L Auxiliary Timer 1 Element Tripped

25 0x02000000L Auxiliary Timer 2 Element Tripped

26 0x04000000L Auxiliary Timer 3 Element Tripped

27 0x08000000L Manual/Remote Close in Progress

Page 122: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 10 of 14

28 0x10000000L –

29 0x20000000L Trip Occurred due to Group 2 Settings

30 0x40000000L –

31 0x80000000L –

This 32 bit word can be found in packet #4 of the event record as the menu cellvalue. A decoded text form can be found in packet #3 as the ASCII TextDescription of the event (refer to Courier User Manual). The value can be decodedto establish which elements were operated at the time of the event.

4.12 Fault records

Although fault records are stored in the event records and they may be extracted inthis way, it may be necessary in some instances to extract the fault records directly.To do this, the record number must be first entered in menu cell 0101 so that thecorrect fault record can be extracted. Fn is the record for the last fault; Fn-1 is theprevious fault record and Fn-4 is the oldest record. Then the values for menucolumn 01 should be requested.

The Courier User Guide gives the detailed commands associated with thesefunctions.

4.13 Disturbance records

The procedure for setting up the disturbance recorder in the relays, is fullydescribed in Chapter 5, Section 6 of this manual. If the extraction of these recordsis to be incorporated in some bespoke software program reference should bemade to the Courier User Guide for the relevant commands that are necessary toextract the records.

It is recommended that all such records are stored in a Comtrade format to enablecommercially available programs to use the files. Comtrade includes minimum andmaximum values for each analogue channel. In all K Range relays these are 0 and32767.

Section 5. SETTING CONTROL

Control functions via a K Range relay can be performed over the serialcommunication link. They include change of individual relay settings, change ofsetting groups, remote control of the circuit breaker, and operation and latchingselected output relays.

Remote control is restricted to those functions that have been selected in the relaysmenu table and the selection cannot be changed without entering the password.CRC and message length checks are used on each message received. Noresponse is given for received messages with a detected error. The master stationcan be set to resend a command a set number of times if it does not receive areply or receives a reply with a detected error.

Note: Control commands are generally performed by changing the value of a celland are actioned by the setting change procedure, as described in Chapter6, 3.1, and have the same inherent security. No replies are permitted forglobal commands as these would cause contention on the bus; instead adouble send is used for verification of the message by the relay for this type

Page 123: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 11 of 14

of command. Confirmation that a control command, or setting change, has beenaccepted is issued by the relay and an error message is returned when it isrejected.

The command to change setting group does not give an error message when thegroup 2 settings are disabled unless link SD3 = 0 to inhibit response to a remotesetting group change commands.

5.1 Remote setting change

The relay will only respond to setting change commands via the serial port if linkSD0 = 1. Setting SD0 = 0 inhibits all remote setting changes with the exception ofthe SD software links and the password entry. Thus, with link SD0 = 0, remotesetting changes are password protected.

To change them, the password must be remotely entered and the function link SDfunction link SD0 set to “1” to enable remote setting changes. When all settingchanges have been made, set link SD0 = 0 to restore password protection toremote setting changes.

5.2 Remote control of setting group

The setting group selection is fully described in Chapter 4, Section 12.1 includingthe remote control of this function. Group 2 must be activated before it can beselected by setting software link SD4 = 1. Set link SD3 = 1 to enable the relay torespond to change setting group commands, via the serial port to select group 2and set SD3 = 0 to inhibit this function.

If conventional SCADA has an output relay assigned to select the alternative settinggroup then it may be used to energise a logic input assigned in the input mask[0D14 Set Grp2]. In this case set link SD3 = 0.

Section 6. REMOTE OPERATION OF OUTPUT RELAYS

The KVFG relay responds to the load shed by level Courier commands. These wereintended to be used to control the load shedding control of conventional voltageregulating relays and can of course still be used for that purpose. However, it alsoprovides a way of remotely operating and latching selected output relays. In thefollowing example it is assumed that relays are allocated in the load sheddingoutput masks as follows:

RLY0 assigned in [0E1B Level1]

RLY1 assigned in [0E1C Level2]

RLY2 assigned in [0E1D Level3]

The following truth table then applies:

Command RLY 0 RLY 1 RLY 3

Load shed to level 0 0 0 0

Load shed to level 1 1 0 0

Load shed to level 2 0 1 0

Load shed to level 3 0 0 1

Page 124: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 12 of 14

If the relays are assigned as follows :

RLY0 assigned in [0E1B Level1]

RLY1 assigned in [0E1C Level2]

RLY0, RLY1 & RLY2 assigned in [0E1D Level3]

The truth table would read:

Command RLY 0 RLY 1 RLY 3

Load shed to level 0 0 0 0

Load shed to level 1 1 0 0

Load shed to level 2 0 1 0

Load shed to level 3 1 1 1

The relays will retain their selected state until a new command is received.

The settings will be stored when the relay is powered-down and restored again onpower-up. This allows these particular outputs to be used to select other functionssuch as blocking under/overvoltage elements.

Section 7. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL

To set-up the relay for circuit breaker control, relay RLY7 must be assigned in outputmask [0E16 CB Trip] and RLY6 in output mask [0E17 CB Close].

Some circuit breakers require the closing pulse to be interrupted when a tripcommand is issued during the closing sequence, such as when closing onto a fault.This is to prevent pumping of the circuit breaker, ie. reclosing again when the tripsignal is terminated, and it can be arranged by setting link SD9 = 1. Some othertypes of circuit breaker require the close pulse to be maintained and to achievethis, set link SD9 = 0.

Figure 2: Circuit breaker control logic

ODOE L Trip

ODOF L Close

OD1O Ext Trip

SD2

LOG6

V2 Cl Bl

RLY 3

RLY 7

1

1

1

1

OE16 CB Trip

OE17 CB CloseCIRCUIT BREAKERCONTROL

FAULT RECORD& FLAG LATCHINITIATION

NS2 SD9

tTRIP

tCLOSERESET

Trip Circuit Breaker

Close Circuit Breaker

GENERATE CIRCUIT BREAKERMAINTENANCE RECORDS

LATCH RED TRIP LEDLATCH FLAGS

GENERATE FAULT RECORD &COPY TO EVENT RECORDS

Page 125: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 13 of 14

7.1 Remote control of circuit breaker

Set link SD2 = 1 to enable remote control of the circuit breaker. The ACCESS,PAS&T, or other suitable program that supports this feature can then be used toperform the remote control of this plant item. When using PAS&T, logic inputs mustbe assigned in input masks [0D15 CB Closed] and [0D16 CB Open] to indicatethe status of the circuit breaker so that a table of circuit breakers and their statuscan be generated. If the circuit breaker can be racked into an alternative position,such that it can then be connected to busbar 2 instead of busbar 1, then a logicinput must be assigned in mask [0D17 Bus2] if this information is required to bedisplayed by PAS&T.

Password protection for remote circuit breaker control can be applied as follows.Set link SD2 = 0 to inhibit remote changes. To make a remote change, enter thepassword, set link SD2 = 1, and send the command to control the circuit breaker.Then to re-establish password protection set link SD2 = 0 again.

7.2 Local control of the circuit breaker

If local controls are routed to the circuit breaker via the logic inputs assigned inmasks [0D0E LTrip] and [0D0F LClose], the circuit breaker maintenance recordswill be updated for local control of the circuit breaker. In this case it will be theaction of relay RLY7 operating that causes the record to be incremented asdescribed in Chapter 5, Section 4.1.

7.3 Safe manual closing of the circuit breaker

There have been instances of injury to personnel when closing a circuit breakeronto a fault. So, from a health and safety point of view, it is sometimes considerednecessary to manually close the circuit breaker from a safe distance. This isparticularly important, when the autoreclose has locked-out, or after maintenanceon the primary plant when temporary earth clamps may have been left connected.

If the closure of the circuit breaker is routed via the KVFG relay, any of thefollowing procedures may be considered:

7.3.1 Closing the circuit breaker via the serial communication port

If the serial port of the relay has no connections made to it, then the terminals 54and 56 can be connected to a jack plug on the front of the panel. To close thecircuit breaker from a safe distance it is then only necessary to plug in anextension lead and connect it to a laptop computer. The circuit breaker can then beclosed as described in Section 7.1.

7.3.2 Closing the circuit breaker via a lead mounted push-button

A spare logic input of the relay can be wired, via the field voltage supply of therelay, to a plug that is mounted on the panel of the cubicle. In this case a jackplug is not advised because the two terminals may be temporarily short circuitedwhen the plug is being inserted. This logic input is then assigned in the input mask[0D0F LClose].

To operate the circuit breaker an extension lead is plugged into the socket and alead mounted push-button at the other end is then pressed to initiate a pulse offixed duration to close the circuit breaker. For extra security, one of the auxiliarytimers may be connected in the control path, so that the push-button has to bepressed for the set time of the timer before the circuit breaker will close.

Page 126: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 6

Page 14 of 14

7.3.3 Delayed manual closure of the circuit breaker

If auxiliary timer Aux3 is not being used for some other purpose and either Aux1or Aux2 is also available then proceed as follows:

1. Set link LOG5 = 0 to give Aux3 a delay on drop-off.

2. Allocate an output relay in mask [0E1A Aux3] and connect its contact to aspare logic input.

3. Assign this logic input in input mask [0D11 Aux1] to start Aux1 or [0D12 Aux2]to start Aux2.

4. Assign an output relay in mask [0E18 Aux1] or [0E19 Aux2] depending on thetimer to be used.

5. Energise a logic input via the contact of this output relay and assign it in inputmask [0D0F LClose] to initiate the closing pulse.

6. Allocate a logic input in mask [0D13 Aux3] and arrange for this to beenergised via a switch (preferably a key switch) that is spring loaded in the offposition.

When the initiating switch is closed momentarily timer Aux3 will pick-up its outputrelay which will remain picked-up for the set time of Aux3. Timer Aux1 (or Aux2)will be picked up by the output relay assigned to Aux3 and when it times out it willpick-up a relay that triggers the close pulse via the LClose input. The time setting forAux1 (or Aux2) should be the required delay and Aux3 should be set 2 secondslonger. When Aux3 times out the circuit resets.

The close sequence can be interrupted by breaking the link, from the output ofAux3 to the logic input initiating Aux1 (or Aux2, whichever is being used), with apush-button or an alternative position on the key switch. Note that these timershave very wide setting ranges and that the delay is in the order of 20 to 30seconds only.

Where no auxiliary timers are available the close pulse could be initiated byenergising a logic input assigned in the input mask [0D0F LClose] via a pushbutton connected via a twisted pair of wires of sufficient length. If an auxiliarytimer is available and is connected in the initiating path it would add to thesecurity.

Section 8. AIDS TO CIRCUIT BREAKER MAINTENANCE

The number of circuit breaker operations is recorded under MEASUREMENTS (2)to assist in determining the need for circuit breaker maintenance.

Page 127: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 7Technical Data

Page 128: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 129: AREVA KVFG R8559C

7. TECHNICAL DATA 11.1 Ratings 11.1.1 Inputs 11.1.2 Outputs 11.2 Burdens 11.2.1 Reference voltage input 11.2.2 Auxiliary voltage 11.2.3 Opto-isolated inputs 21.3 Setting ranges 21.3.1 Voltage operation 21.3.2 Frequency operation 21.3.3 Time setting ranges 21.3.3.1 Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) 21.3.3.2 Definite independent time (DT) 31.3.3.3 Auxiliary time delays 31.3.4 VT ratio setting 41.4 Measurements displayed 41.5 Accuracy 41.5.1 Reference conditions 41.5.2 Protection settings 51.5.3 Protection element time delays 51.5.4 Auxiliary timers 51.5.5 Measurements 61.6 Influencing quantities 61.6.1 Ambient temperature 61.6.2 Frequency 61.6.3 Voltage 61.6.4 Auxiliary supply 61.7 Opto-isolated inputs 61.8 Output relays 71.9 Operation indicator 71.10 Communication port (K-Bus) 71.11 High voltage withstand 81.11.1 Dielectric withstand 81.11.2 High voltage impulse 81.11.3 Insulation resistance 81.11.4 High frequency disturbance 81.11.5 Fast transient disturbance 81.11.6 EMC compliance 81.11.7 Product safety 81.12 IEEE/ANSI Specifications 91.13 Environmental 91.13.1 Temperature 91.13.5 Shock and bump 91.14 Model numbers 101.15 Frequency response 11

FIGURESFigure 1. Response of Fourier filtering/frequency tracking 11

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Contents

Page 130: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 131: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 1 of 11

Section 7. TECHNICAL DATA

1.1 Ratings

1.1.1 Inputs

Rated Voltage across VT inputs(Vn) (Vrms)

Continuous 1 minute

110 440 –

440 800 1000

Where Vn is the rated line voltage of the system.

Operative range

Auxiliary voltage Rated voltage DC supply AC supply Crest(Vx) (V) (V) (V) (V)

Auxiliary powered 24 – 125 19 – 150 50 – 133 19048 – 250 33 – 300 87 – 265 380

Frequency Nominal rating Operative range(Fn) (Hz) (Hz)

Freq. tracking 50 or 60 45 – 65

Non–tracking 50 49 – 51

Non tracking 60 59 – 61

Rating Off state On state(Vdc) (Vdc) (Vdc)

Logic Inputs 50 ≤12 ≥35

1.1.2 Outputs

Field voltage 48V dc (current limited to 60mA)

1.2 Burdens

1.2.1 Reference voltage input

Vn = 110V 0.02VA @ 63.5V VT input

Vn = 440V 0.08VA @ 254V VT input

1.2.2 Auxiliary voltage

DC supply 2.5 – 6.0 W at Vx max with no output relays or logic inputsenergized

4.0 – 8.0 W at Vx max with 2 output relays & 2 logic inputsenergized

5.5 – 12 W at Vx max with all output relays & logic inputsenergized

Page 132: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 2 of 11

AC supply 6.0 – 12 VA at Vx max with no output relays or logic inputsenergized

6.0 – 14 VA at Vx max with 2 output relays & 2 logic inputsenergized

13 – 23 VA at Vx max with all output relays & logic inputsenergized

1.2.3 Opto-isolated inputs

DC supply 0.25W per input (50V, 10k)

1.3 Setting ranges

1.3.1 Voltage operation

Stage Symbol Range(Vs) Step size

Under/overvoltage 1 1V 5 – 200V 1V

2 2V 5 – 200V 1V

3 3V 5 – 200V 1V

4 4V 5 – 200V 1V

Neutral displacement 1 1Vo 1 – 100V 1V

or residual voltage 2 2Vo 1 – 100V 1V

3 3Vo 1 – 100V 1V

Negative sequence (KVFG 142) 1 1V2 1 – 150V 1V

2 2V2 1 – 150V 1V

Negative sequence (KVFG 122) 1 1V2 5 – 150V 1V

2 2V2 5 – 150V 1V

The above settings are applicable to a 110V nominal voltage rating multiply byfour for the 440V version.

1.3.2 Frequency operation

Stage Symbol Range Step size

Under/overfrequency 1 1F 46 – 64Hz 0.01Hz

2 2F 46 – 64Hz 0.01Hz

3 3F 46 – 64Hz 0.01Hz

4 4F 46 – 64Hz 0.01Hz

1.3.3 Time setting ranges

The operating time characteristic for all voltage measuring elements are selectableas either inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) or definite time (DT). The frequencyelement operating time may only be set as definite time.

1.3.3.1 Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)

The inverse operating time characteristic is given by the following mathematicalexpression:

Page 133: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 3 of 11

t = K secondsl M –1 l

Where

t = Operating time in seconds

K = Time multiplier

M = Applied voltage/voltage setting

The K factor is selectable for each available stage as follows.

Stage Symbol Range(s) Step size

Under/overvoltage 1 1V(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

2 2V(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

3 3V(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

4 4V(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

Neutral displacement 1 1Vo(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

or residual voltage 2 2Vo(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

3 3Vo(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

Negative sequence 1 1V2(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

2 2V2(tms) 0.5 – 100 0.5

1.3.3.2 Definite independent time (DT)

Stage Symbol Range(s) Step size

Under/overvoltage 1 1tV 0 – 100 0.1

2 2tV 0 – 100 0.1

3 3tV 0 – 100 0.1

4 4tV 0 – 100 0.1

Neutral displacement 1 1tVo 0 – 600 0.01 – graded

or residual voltage 2 2tVo 0 – 600 0.01 – graded

3 3tVo 0 – 600 0.01 – graded

Negative sequence 1 1tV2 0 – 100 0.1

2 2tV2 0 – 100 0.1

Under/overfrequency 1 1tF 0 – 100 0.01

2 2tF 0 – 100 0.01

3 3tF 0 – 100 0.01

4 4tF 0 – 100 0.01

1.3.3.3 Auxiliary time delays

Three independant auxiliary timers are available, tAUX1 provides delay on pick-up(DPU) whereas tAUX2 and tAUX3 are each capable of providing delay on pick-up(DPU) or delay on drop-off (DDO) operation.

Timer delays tTRIP and tCLOSE are used for the remote control of circuit breakers.

Page 134: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 4 of 11

Setting range Step size

tAUX1 Definite time 0 to 24days 0.01s min – graded

tAUX2 Definite time 0 to 24days 0.01s min – graded

tAUX3 Definite time 0 to 24days 0.01s min – graded

tTRIP Definite time 0.5 to 5s 0.1s

tCLOSE Definite time 0.5 to 5s 0.1s

1.3.4 VT ratio setting

Setting range

VT Ratios 9999 : 1 Default = 1 : 1

1.4 Measurements displayed

Range Units

110V nominalUnder/overvoltage (0 – 327) x VT ratio V (phase/neutral

or phase/phase)

Residual voltage (Vo) (0 – 327) x VT ratio V

Positive sequence (V1) (0 – 327) x VT ratio V

Negative sequence (V2) (0 – 327) x VT ratio V

440V nominalUnder/overvoltage (0 – 900*) x VT ratio V (phase/neutral

or phase/phase)

Residual voltage (Vo) (0 – 900*) x VT ratio V

Positive sequence (V1) (0 – 900*) x VT ratio V

Negative sequence (V2) (0 – 900*) x VT ratio V

CB operations (0 – 65535)

Frequency 45 – 65 (or 0 ) Hz

* – The continuous rating of the 440V model is not to exceed 800V across any VTinput winding.

1.5 Accuracy

Unless stated otherwise all accuracies are of setting.

1.5.1 Reference conditions

Ambient temperature 20°C

Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz (whichever is set)

Auxiliary voltage 24V to 125V (125V dc rated auxiliary input)

48V to 250V (250V dc rated auxiliary)

Page 135: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 5 of 11

1.5.2 Protection settings

Pickup accuracy Reference range

Under/overvoltage ±3%, typically ±2% Setting range

Neutral displacement ±5%, typically ±2% Setting range

Negative sequence ±3% 5V – 150V (KVFG 142)15V – 150V (KVFG 122)

Under/overfrequency ±0.1%, typically ±0.05%

Repeatability ±0.5%

Dropoff/pickup ratio Reference range

Overvoltage Typically >95% Setting range

Undervoltage Typically <105% 35V – 200V

Vo measured Typically >95% Setting range

Vo calculated Typically >95% 15V – 100V

Negative sequence Typically >95% 10V – 150V (KVFG 142)25V – 150V (KVFG 122)

Overfrequency >99.5% Setting range

Underfrequency >100.5% Setting range

1.5.3 Protection element time delays

Operating time

Inverse time Voltage elements The effect due to the measuredvoltage varying by the claimedtolerance, plus <50ms

Definite time Voltage elements ±1% plus <50ms

Frequency element ±1% of setting plus <200msfor steps of >±5% of setting

Instantaneous Neutral displacement <40ms

Under/overvoltage <40ms

Negative sequence <50ms

Frequency element Typically <300ms(see Appendix 4)

Overshoot time All elements <50ms when the input isreduced to zero

Disengagement Voltage elements <50ms

Frequency elements <250ms for step changes from(Fs + 0.5Hz) to (Fs – 0.5Hz)

1.5.4 Auxiliary timers

Operating time Set time (0.5%(set time) + (15 to 35)ms

Disengagement time 0 to 10 ms (for timers alone)

15 to 30ms (including output relays and opto inputs)

Page 136: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 6 of 11

1.5.5 Measurements

Voltage ±1% at nomimal volts

Frequency ±0.04% at nominal frequency

1.6 Influencing quantities

1.6.1 Ambient temperature

Variation –25 to +55°C

Voltage settings ±0.03% per °C

Operation times ±1%

1.6.2 Frequency

Variation 45 to 65Hz

Voltage settings ±1%

Operating times ±1%

1.6.3 Voltage

Variation Blocking voltage up to continuous rating

Frequency settings <±0.05%

Operating times ±1%

1.6.4 Auxiliary supply

Variation 19 to 150V dc or 50 to 133V ac (24/125V nominal)

33 to 300V dc or 87 to 265V ac (48/250V nominal)

Voltage settings ±0.5%

Operation times ±0.5%

1.7 Opto-isolated inputs

Capture time 12.5 ±2.5ms at 50Hz

10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz

Release time 12.5 ±2.5ms at 50Hz

10.4 ±2.1ms at 60Hz

Minimum operatingvoltage >35V dc

Maximum operatingvoltage 50Vdc

Input resistance 10kΩ

(add 12kΩ for every additional 50V in excess of 50V)

Maximum series leadresistance 2kΩ for single input at 40V min.

1kΩ for 2 inputs in parallel at 40V min.

0.5kΩ for 4 inputs in parallel at 40V min.

Page 137: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 7 of 11

Maximum ac inducedloop voltage 50Vrms (thermal limit)

Maximum capacitancecoupled ac voltage 250Vrms via 0.1µF

1.8 Output relays

Output relays 0 to 7

Type 1 make

Rating Make30A and carry for 0.2s

Carry5A continuous

Break DC – 50W resistive

25W inductive (L/R = 0.04s)

AC – 1250VA (maxima of 5A)

Subject to a maxima of 5A and 300V

Durability >10,000 operations

Watchdog

Type 1 make + 1 break

Rating Make10A and carry for 0.2s

Carry5A continuous

Break DC – 30W resistive

15W inductive (L/R = 0.04s)

AC – 1250VA (maxima of 5A)

Subject to a maxima of 5A and 300V

Durability >10,000 operations

1.9 Operation indicator

3 Light Emitting Diodes – internally powered.

16 character by 2 line Liquid Crystal Display (with backlight).

1.10 Communication port (K-Bus)

Language Courier

Transmission Synchronous – RS485 voltage levels

Format HDLC

Baud Rate 64kbit/s

K-Bus Cable Screened twisted pair

Length 1000m

Bus Loading Multidrop (32 units)

Insolation 2kV rms for 1minute

Page 138: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 8 of 11

1.11 High voltage withstand

1.11.1 Dielectric withstandIEC 60255-5:1977

2kV rms for one minute between all case terminals(except terminal 1) connected together and thecase earth/terminals 1.

2kV rms for one minute between terminals ofindependent circuits, including contact circuits.

1kV rms for 1 minute across the open contacts ofthe watchdog relays.

ANSI/IEEE C37.901989 (R1994) 1.5kV rms for 1 minute across open contacts of

output relays.

1.11.2 High voltage impulseIEC 60255-5:1977 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals

and all terminals to case earth.

1.11.3 Insulation resistanceIEC 60255-5:1977 >100MΩ when measured at 500Vdc

1.11.4 High frequency disturbance

IEC 60255-22-1:1988 Class III 2.5kV peak between independent circuits andcase.

1.0kV peak across terminals of the same circuit(except metallic contacts).

1.11.5 Fast transient disturbance

IEC 60255-22-4 :1992Class III & IV 2kV, 5kHz & 4kV, 2.5kHz applied to all inputs

and outputs.

1.11.6 EMC compliance

89/336/EEC Compliance to the European Commission Directiveon EMC is claimed via the Technical ConstructionFile route.

EN50081-2:1994 Generic Standards used to establish conformity.EN50082-2:1995

1.11.7 Product safety

73/23/EEC Compliance with European Commission LowVoltage Directive

EN 61010-1:1993/A3:1995 Compliance is demonstrated by reference toEN 60950:1992/A11:1997 generic safety standards.

Electrostatic discharge test

IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Class 3 (8kV) discharge in air with cover in place.

Class 2 (4kV) point contact discharge with coverremoved.

Page 139: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 9 of 11

1.12 IEEE/ANSI Specifications

1.12.1 Surge withstand capability C37.90.1 – 1989.

1.12.2 Radio electromagneticinterference C37.90.2 – 1995.

1.13 Environmental

1.13.1 TemperatureIEC 60068-2-1:1990 (cold) Storage and transit –25ºC to +70ºC.

IEC 60068-2-2:1974 (dry heat)Operating –25°C to +55°C.

1.13.2 HumidityIEC 60068-2-3:1969 56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40°C.

1.13.3 Enclosure protectionIEC 60529:1989 IP50 (Dust protected).

1.13.4 VibrationIEC 60255-21-1:1988 Response Class 1.

Endurance Class 2.

1.13.5 Shock and bumpIEC 60255-21 2:1988 Class 1

1.13.6 SeismicIEC 60255-21-3:1993 Class 1

Page 140: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 10 of 11

1.14 Model numbers

Relay type: K V F G 1 2 0 1 D A

Measuring elements:

2 pole 2

4 pole 4

Configuration:

Default 0 1

Case size:

Size 4 MIDOS Flush Mounting D

Auxiliary voltage (Vx):

24/125V 2

48/250V 5

Operating voltage (Vn):

110V ac/50 – 60Hz 1

440V ac/50 – 60Hz 4

Language :

English E

French F

German G

Spanish S

Page 141: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 7

Page 11 of 11

Fourier filter response

Anti-aliasing filter response

Harmonic

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80

1.15 Frequency response

Figure 1. Response of Fourier filtering/frequency tracking

Measurement is based on the Fourier derived value of the fundamental componentof voltage and Figure 1 shows the frequency response that results from thisfiltering. The “1” on the horizontal scale relates to the selected rated frequency ofthe relay and the figures “2”, “3”, “4” etc. are the second, third and fourthharmonic frequencies respectively. It can be seen that harmonics up to andincluding the 6th are suppressed, giving no output. The 7th is the first predominantharmonic and this is attenuated to approximately 30% by the anti-aliasing filter.For power frequencies that are not equal to the selected rated frequency ie. thefrequency does not coincide with “1” on the horizontal scale, the harmonics willnot be of zero amplitude. For small frequency deviations of ±1Hz, this is not aproblem but to allow for larger deviations, an improvement is obtained by theaddition of frequency tracking.

With frequency tracking the sampling rate of the analogue/digital conversion isautomatically adjusted to match the applied signal. In the absence of a signal ofsuitable amplitude to track, the sample rate defaults to suit that of the selected ratedfrequency (Fn) for the relay. In the presence of a signal of sufficient amplitude andwithin the tracking range (45 to 65Hz), the relay will lock on to the signal so thatthe “1” on the horizontal axis in Figure 1 will coincide with the measuredfrequency of the signal. The resulting output for 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6thharmonics will be zero. Thus the response in Figure 1 applies when the relay is notfrequency tracking but the input is at the selected rated frequency (Fn) or if therelay is tracking a frequency within the range 45 to 65Hz.

Power frequency signals are predominant in phase quantities and are thereforeused in the frequency tracking routine, whereas, residual voltage quantities oftencontain a high proportion of harmonic signals. The residual voltage element ofmulti-pole relays will generally be locked to the power frequency as the relay tracksit using the phase quantities.

Page 142: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 143: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Chapter 8Commissioning

Page 144: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 145: AREVA KVFG R8559C

1. INTRODUCTION 12. PRODUCT MENU FAMILIARISATION 13. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING 33.1 Minimum equipment required 33.2 Optional equipment 34. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS 34.1 With the relay de-energised 44.1.1 Visual inspection 44.1.2 Insulation 44.1.3 External wiring 54.1.4 Watchdog contacts 54.2 With the relay energised 54.2.1 Watchdog contacts 64.2.2 Light emitting diodes (LEDs) 64.2.3 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 64.2.4 Field voltage supply 74.2.5 Input opto-isolators 74.2.6 Output relays 74.2.7 Communications ports 84.2.8 Voltage inputs 85. SETTING VERIFICATION TESTS 95.1 Apply settings 95.2 Verify settings 105.3 Test stage 1 of the under/overvoltage function (optional) 105.3.1 Connect the test circuit 105.3.2 Set the ac voltage source 105.3.3 Determine the expected operating time 115.3.4 Check the thermal withstand 115.3.5 Perform test 116. WIRING VERIFICATION TEST 117. FINAL CHECKS 128. PROBLEM SOLVING 128.1 Password lost or not accepted 128.2 Protection settings 138.2.1 Settings for neutral voltage displacement protection function not displayed 138.2.2 Settings for under/overvoltage protection function not displayed 138.2.3 Settings for under/overfrequency protection function not displayed 138.2.4 Settings for negative sequence overvoltage protection function not displayed 138.2.5 Second setting group not displayed 148.2.6 Function links can not be changed 148.2.7 Curve selection can not be changed 148.3 Alarms 148.3.1 Watchdog alarm 148.3.2 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 0 = ‘1’ 14

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Contents

Page 146: AREVA KVFG R8559C

8.3.3 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 1 = ‘1’ 158.3.4 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 2 = ‘1’ 158.3.5 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 3 = ‘1’ 158.3.6 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 4 = ‘1’ 158.3.7 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 5 = ‘1’ 158.3.8 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 7 = ‘1’ 158.3.9 Fault flags will not reset 158.4 Records 158.4.1 Problems with event records 158.4.2 Problems with disturbance records 168.5 Circuit breaker operation counter 178.6 Communications 178.6.1 Measured values do not change 178.6.2 Relay no longer responding 178.6.3 No response to remote control commands 178.7 Output relays remain picked up 189. MAINTENANCE 189.1 Remote testing 189.1.1 Alarms 189.1.2 Measurement accuracy 189.1.3 Trip test 189.1.4 Circuit breaker operations counter 199.2 Local testing 199.2.1 Alarms 199.2.2 Measurement accuracy 199.2.3 Trip test 199.2.4 Circuit breaker operations counter 199.2.5 Additional tests 199.3 Method of repair 209.3.1 Replacing a pcb 209.3.1.1 Replacement of user interface 209.3.1.2 Replacement of main processor board 209.3.1.3 Replacement of auxiliary expansion board 209.3.2 Replacing output relays 209.3.3 Replacing the power supply board 219.3.4 Replacing the back plane 219.4 Recalibration 21

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Contents

Page 147: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 1 of 21

Section 1. INTRODUCTION

The KVFG relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protectionand non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking so that, for the majority of failures that could occur within the relay, allfunctions will cease to operate and an error will be flagged. As a result of this, thecommissioning tests do not need to be as thorough as with relays using electro-mechanical and discrete electronic components.

To commission numeric relays it is only necessary to verify that the hardware isfunctioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have beenapplied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relayif the settings have been verified by one of the following methods:

• Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software(Preferred method)

• Via the operator interface.

The timing test performed on a single element, after the customer settings havebeen verified, is solely for reassurance that the relay is functioning correctly atthose settings and does not prove anything more than the other tests. It is thereforeoptional.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for thecorrect selection of the settings and the scheme logic being applied by externalcustomer wiring.

Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided in Appendix 4 forcompletion as required.

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULDBE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE “SAFETY SECTION” AND CHAPTER2, “HANDLING AND INSTALLATION”, OF THIS MANUAL.

Section 2. PRODUCT MENU FAMILIARISATION

When commissioning a KVFG relay for the first time, an hour should be allowed tobecome familiar with the menu. Chapter 3, Section 3 contains a detaileddescription of the menu structure but the key functions are summarised in Table 1.

With the cover in place only the [F] and [0] keys are accessible. Data can only beread or flag and counter functions reset. No protection or configuration settingscan be changed.

Removing the cover allows access to the [+] and [–] keys. All settings can bechanged and there is greater mobility around the menu.

In Table 1, [F] long indicates that the key is pressed for at least 1 second and [F]short for less than 0.5 second. This allows the same key to perform more than onefunction.

Page 148: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 2 of 21

Current display Key press Effect of action

Default display [F] short or Display moves to menu column heading[F] long “SYSTEM DATA”

[+] † Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[–]† Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[0] short Steps through the available default displays

[0] long Backlight turns ON – no other effect

Fault flags after a trip [F] short or Display moves to menu column heading[F] long “SYSTEM DATA”

[+] † Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[–]† Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[0] short Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[0] long Resets trip LED and returns to default display

Column heading [F] short Move to next item in menu column

[F] long Move to next column heading

[+] † Move to previous column heading

[–]† Move to next column heading

[0] short Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[0] long Re-establishes password protection and return todefault display

Any menu cell [F] short Move to next item in menu column

[F] + [0] Move to previous item in menu column

[F] long Move to next column heading

[0] short Backlight turns ON – no other effect

[0] long Resets the value if the cell is resettable

A settable cell † [+] or [–] Puts relay in the setting mode (flashing cursor on bottomline of display) if the cell is not password protected

Setting mode † [F] Changes to the confirmation display. If function links,relay or input masks are displayed, the [F] key will stepthrough them from left to right and finally changing tothe confirmation display

[+] Increments value – rapidly increases if held depressed

[–] Decrements value – rapidly increases if held depressed

[0] Escapes from the setting mode without the settingbeing changed

Confirmation mode † [+] Confirms setting and enters the new value

[–] Returns prospective value of setting for checking andfurther modification

[0] Escapes from the setting mode without the settingbeing changed

† Only available with front cover removed

Table 1: Function keys

Page 149: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 3 of 21

Section 3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING

3.1 Minimum equipment required

Multimeter with suitable ac and dc voltage ranges

Audible continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)

Variable transformer (Variac) or suitable ac voltage generator

Double pole switch box

Resistor (for testing the undervoltage element only)

Step-up transformer to cover relay setting range (415/440V version only)

Electronic timer

Phase rotation meter (not required if KVFG 122 with Vo input configuration)

3.2 Optional equipment

Multi-finger test plug type MMLB 01 (if test block type MMLG installed)

A portable PC, with appropriate software and a KITZ 101 K-Bus/IEC 60870-5interface unit (if one is not already installed at site) will be useful and saveconsiderable time. However, it is not essential to commissioning.

A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).

Section 4. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

The product verification tests cover all aspects of the product that need to bechecked to ensure that the relay has not been physically damaged prior tocommissioning, is functioning correctly and all measurements are within the statedtolerances.

If the application-specific settings have already been applied to the relay, it isnecessary to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration oncompletion of commissioning. This could be done by:

• Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portablePC with appropriate software for downloading the settings to the relay)

• Extracting the settings from the product itself (this again requires a portable PCwith appropriate software)

• Using a written record. This could be done using a copy of the setting recordlocated in Appendix 4.

If the customer has changed the password that prevents unauthorised changes tosome of the settings, either the revised password should be provided or thecustomer should restore the original password prior to commencement of testing.

Note: In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can beobtained from the Company by quoting the model and serial numbers ofthe particular relay. The recovery password is unique to that relay and willnot work on any other relay.

Page 150: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 4 of 21

4.1 With the relay de-energised

The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply ormeasured voltages being applied to the relay and the trip circuit isolated.

If an MMLG test block is provided, this can easily be achieved by inserting testplug type MMLB 01 which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the testblock. Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the schemediagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard.For example, the test block may also be associated with protection currenttransformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug, which correspondto the current transformer secondary windings, are linked before the test plug isinserted into the test block.

DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENTTRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BELETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.

If an MMLG test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relayshould be isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks.

4.1.1 Visual inspection

Loosen the cover screws and remove the cover. The relay module can now bewithdrawn from its case. In accordance with Chapter 2, Section 2 (Handling ofElectronic Equipment), carefully examine the module and case to see that nophysical damage has occurred prior to commissioning.

Check that the serial and model numbers on the front plate and label on the left-hand, inside face of the case are identical. The only time that the serial numbersmay not match is when a failed relay has been replaced to provide continuity ofprotection.

The rating information on the front of the relay should also be checked to ensure itis correct for the particular installation.

Ensure that the case earthing connection, above the rear terminal block, is used toconnect the relay to a local earth bar. Where there is more than one relay in a tier,it is recommended that a copper earth bar should be fitted connecting the earthterminals of each case in the same tier together. However, as long as an adequateearth connection is made between relays, the use of a copper earth bar is notessential.

4.1.2 Insulation

Insulation resistance tests only need to be done if the customer requires them to bedone and they haven’t been performed during installation.

If insulation resistance tests are required, isolate all wiring from the earth and testthe insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage notexceeding 1000V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily strappedtogether.

The main groups of terminals on the relays are:a) Voltage transformer circuits.b) Auxiliary voltage supply.c) Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs.d) Relay contacts.

Page 151: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 5 of 21

e) Communication port.f) Case earth.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring iscorrectly reconnected to the relay.

4.1.3 External wiring

Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or schemediagram. The relay diagram number appears on a label on the left-hand, insideface of the case and the corresponding connection diagram can be found inAppendix 3 of this manual.

If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against thescheme diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the live sideof the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7etc.). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relay’s positiveand negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiringagainst the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with thecustomer’s normal practice.

4.1.4 Watchdog contacts

Isolate the relay trip contacts and re-insert the relay module. Using a continuitytester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in Table 2 for a de-energised relay.

Terminals Contact StateRelay De-energised Relay Energised

3 and 5 Closed Open

4 and 6 Open Closed

Table 2: Watchdog contact status

4.2 With the relay energised

The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software isfunctioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied tothe relay but not the measured voltages.

The relay can be operated from either an ac or a dc auxiliary supply but theincoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 3.

Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within theoperating range.

Relay rating (V) DC operating AC operating Maximum crestrange (V) range (V) voltage (V)

24/125 19 – 150 50 – 133 190

48/250 33 – 300 87 – 265 380

Table 3: Operational range of auxiliary supply

It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of theupper rated voltage on a dc auxiliary supply. However, in all cases the peak value

Page 152: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 6 of 21

of the auxiliary supply must not exceed the maximum crest voltage. Do notenergise the relay using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as thiscan seriously damage the relay’s power supply circuitry.

Energise the relay if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range. If an MMLGtest block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug torestore the auxiliary supply to the relay.

4.2.1 Watchdog contacts

Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given inTable 2 for an energised relay.

4.2.2 Light emitting diodes (LEDs)

On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating therelay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (onor off) of the yellow alarm and red trip LED indicators when the relay was lastpowered, and therefore these indicators may be on.

If either the alarm or trip, or both, LEDs are on then these should be reset beforeproceeding with further testing. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out),there is no testing required for that LED because it is known to be operational.

TESTING THE ALARM LED

The alarm LED can simply be tested by entering the password in the[0002 Password] cell as this will cause it to flash.

TESTING THE TRIP LED

The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay.However, if output relays 3 or 7 have been allocated for circuit breaker tripping inthe relay masks for the over/undervoltage protection function, the trip LED willoperate during the optional timing test performed later. Otherwise the trip LED willneed testing.

If neither output relay 3 nor 7 has been assigned for manual circuit breakertripping, with the password entered (use the [0002 Password] cell if not already inthis mode), set relay mask [0E16 CB Trip] bit 7 to ‘1’.

Set cell [0010 CB Control] to ‘Trip’ and confirm the operation by pressing [F]then[+]. Check the trip LED to ensure it comes on.

RESTORING PASSWORD PROTECTION

To restore password protection (stopping changes to password-protected cells),press and hold the [F] key for over 1 second then press and hold the [0] key forover 1 second. Password protection will also be restored automatically 15 minutesafter the last key press. The alarm LED stops flashing to indicate that passwordprotection has been restored.

4.2.3 Liquid crystal display (LCD)

There are no test routines for the LCD. The display itself can be checked by movingthrough the relay menu looking for pixels (the dots on the display used to form thetext) that are not working.

There is an integral backlight in the display that allows settings to be read in allconditions of ambient lighting. It is switched on when any key on the frontplate ismomentarily pressed and is designed to switch off 10 minutes after the last key

Page 153: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 7 of 21

press. Check that the backlight does switches off as it will impose an unnecessaryburden on the station battery if it stays on.

4.2.4 Field voltage supply

The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V that should be used toenergise the opto-isolated inputs. Measure the field voltage across terminals 7 and8. Terminal 7 should be positive with respect to terminal 8 and the voltage shouldbe within the range 45V to 60V when no load is connected.

4.2.5 Input opto-isolators

This test checks that all the opto-inputs are functioning correctly. The KVFG122 hasonly 3 opto-inputs (L0, L1 and L2) while the KVFG142 has the full 8 opto-inputs(L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6 and L7).

To allow the opto-inputs to work, terminal 8 (field voltage supply negative) shouldbe linked to terminal 52 on both models and also to terminal 55 for the KVFG142.The opto-inputs can then be individually energised by connecting terminal 7 (fieldvoltage supply positive) to the appropriate opto-input listed in Table 4.

Note: The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external 50V battery insome installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the fieldvoltage otherwise damage to the relay may result.

Opto-isolator L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7

Terminal number 46 48 50 45 47 49 51 53

Table 4: Opto-isolator connections

The status of each opto-input can be viewed using cell [0020 Log Status].When each opto is energised, one of the characters on the bottom line of thedisplay will change to indicate the new state of the inputs. The number printed onthe frontplate under the display will identify which opto each character represents.A ‘1’ indicates an energised state and a ‘0’ indicates a de-energised state.

4.2.6 Output relays

This test is to check that all the output relays are functioning correctly.

With the password entered (using the [0002 Password] cell), set relay mask[0E16 CB Trip] bit 0 to ‘1’ and the rest (bits 1 to 7) to ‘0’.

Connect an audible continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to outputrelay 0 given in Table 5. Select the [0010 CB Control] cell and press the [+] keyuntil ‘Trip CB’ is displayed. Press the [F] once followed by the [+] key to confirm thechange.

Operation of output relay 0 will be confirmed by the continuity tester sounding forthe duration of the trip pulse time in the [0C05 tTRIP] cell.

Repeat the test for output relays 1 to 3 inclusive for a KVFG122 relay and relays 1to 7 inclusive for a KVFG 142 relay.

Page 154: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 8 of 21

Output Relay [0E16 CB Trip] Mask Setting TerminalNumbers

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 30 and 321 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 34 and 362 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 38 and 403 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 42 and 444 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 29 and 315 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 33 and 356 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 37 and 397 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 41 and 43

Table 5: Settings for output tests

If an output relay is found to have failed, an alternative relay can be temporarilyre-allocated until such time as the KVFG module can be repaired or a replacementcan be installed.

To restore password protection (stopping changes to password-protected cells),press and hold the [F] key for over 1 second then press and hold the [0] key forover 1 second. Password protection will also be restored automatically 15 minutesafter the last key press. The alarm LED stops flashing to indicate that passwordprotection has been restored.

4.2.7 Communications ports

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remotelocation.

It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system fromthe relay to the remote location, just the relay’s K-Bus circuitry and the protocolconverter.

Connect a portable PC running the appropriate software to the incoming (remotefrom relay) side of the protocol converter and ensure that the communicationssettings in the application software are set the same as those on the protocolconvertor.

Check that communications with the KVFG can be established.

4.2.8 Voltage inputs

This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptabletolerances.

All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz.If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [0009 Freq]. Press the[+] key until the displayed frequency is 60Hz, then press the [F] key once followedby the [+] key to confirm the change.

Depending on the relay model and software link settings, the relay can interpretthe measurement as a residual, phase to phase or phase to neutral voltage.To simplify testing, the password should be entered (using the [0002 Password]cell if not already in this mode) and the following settings applied:

• Set cell [0003 SD Links] link A to ‘1’ (KVFG 122 only).• Set cell [0401 ND Links] link 3 to ‘0’ (KVFG 142 only).

Page 155: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 9 of 21

• Set cell [0402 VT Ratio] to 10:1 (only when Vo used).• Set cell [0501 VF Links] link C to ‘1’ (both models).• Set cell [0502 VT Ratio] to 10:1 (both models).

These settings configure the relay so that it treats the measured voltages as phaseto neutral or residual voltages, depending on the voltage transformer input, foreach model and uses a voltage transformer ratio of 10:1 for each voltage input.

To restore password protection (stopping changes to password-protected cells),press and hold the [F] key for over 1 second then press and hold the [0] key forover 1 second. Password protection will also be restored automatically 15 minutesafter the last key press. The alarm LED stops flashing to indicate that passwordprotection has been restored.

Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn, checking it’smagnitude using a multimeter. Refer to Table 6 for the corresponding reading inthe relay’s MEASURE 1 column and record the value displayed. All measuredvoltage values on the relay should equal the applied voltage multiplied by thevoltage transformer ratio set in the [0402 VT Ratio] cell for neutral voltagetransformer inputs or [0502 VT Ratio] cell for phase voltage transformer inputs, asapplicable.

The acceptable tolerance is ±1%.

Voltage applied to Menu cell

Terminals 17 and 20 [0208 Va] (KVFG 142 only)

Terminals 18 and 20 [0209 Vb] (KVFG 142 only)

Terminals 19 and 20 [0208 Va] (KVFG 122)[020A Vc] (KVFG 142)

Terminals 21 and 22 [020B Vo] (KVFG 122, 142)

Table 6: Voltage transformer test configuration

Section 5. SETTING VERIFICATION TESTS

The setting verification tests ensure that all the predetermined settings for theparticular installation (customer’s settings) have been correctly applied to the relayand that the relay is operating correctly at those settings.

5.1 Apply settings

There are two methods of applying the settings:

• Downloading them to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriatesoftware via a KITZ protocol converter. If a KITZ is not installed as part of thecustomer’s scheme, one will have to be temporarily connected to the K-Busterminals of the relay. This method is the preferred as it is much faster and thereis less margin for error.

If a setting file has been created by the customer and provided on a diskette, thiswill save time.

• Enter them manually via the relays operator interface.

Page 156: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 10 of 21

5.2 Verify settings

The settings applied should be carefully checked against the customer’s desiredsettings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this is not consideredessential if a customer-prepared setting file has been downloaded to the relayusing a portable PC.

There are two methods of verifying the settings:

• Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriatesoftware via a KITZ protocol converter and compare with the customer’s originalsetting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copyof the required settings but a portable PC is available).

• Step through the settings using the relay’s operator interface and compare themwith the customer’s record.

5.3 Test stage 1 of the under/overvoltage function (optional)

This timing test performed on a single element is solely for reassurance that therelay is functioning correctly at the settings and does not prove anything more thanthe foregoing tests. It is therefore optional.

To demonstrate that the KVFG is operating correctly at the chosen settings, a timingtest should be performed on the under/overvoltage function if it is enabled (cell[0501 VF Links] link 0 equals ‘1’).

As each stage can be set either for overvoltage or undervoltage protection, with adefinite or inverse time characteristic, it is necessary to look at the settings in cell[0501 VF links] links 1 and 2 as these will determine the test procedure.

5.3.1 Connect the test circuit

Connect the ac voltage source to terminals 19 and 20 of the KVFG with oneconnection taken via one pole of the switch box. This allows the ‘fault’ voltage tobe applied to the relay only during the test.

Where the stage is being used for overvoltage, a voltage will only be applied tothe relay during the test.

However, when used for undervoltage, the relay must see a voltage greater thansetting when not being tested and less than setting during the test. Therefore, theswitch will be used to reduce the voltage measured by the relay during testconditions (eg. by putting a series connected resistor in circuit during the test).

If cell [0501 VF Links] link 2 is set to ‘1’, all phases must be experiencing the underor overvoltage condition for the relay to initiate a trip. Therefore each phasevoltage transformer input should be connected in parallel.

The other pole of the switch box should be connected to start the timer when the‘fault’ voltage is applied to the relay.

An output relay should be connected to stop the timer when a trip is initiated by theunder/overvoltage function. This output relay will be defined in the appropriateoutput relay cell in the RELAY MASK column of the menu. For the KVFG142, thiswill be an output relay allocated cell [0E06 1tVc(-a)]. For the KVFG122, it will bean output relay allocated cell [0E04 1tVa(-b)].

5.3.2 Set the ac voltage source

If cell [0501 VF Links] link 1 equals ‘0’, stage 1 has been set for overvoltageoperation. Set, but don’t apply to the relay, a voltage on the ac voltage source oftwice the stage 1 voltage setting given in the [0503 1V] cell.

Page 157: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 11 of 21

If cell [0501 VF Links] link 1 equals ‘1’, stage 1 has been set for undervoltageoperation. Set the ac voltage source so that prior to testing the voltage is above thestage 1 voltage setting given in cell [0503 1V] and, during testing, half the stage1 voltage setting. However, if cell [0501 VF Links] link D has been set to ‘1’, thevoltage during testing must be greater than 15V as the undervoltage function willbe blocked below this voltage.

5.3.3 Determine the expected operating time

The setting of cell [0504 1V Char] selects the operating characteristic as eitherdefinite time or inverse. If set to definite time, the value of cell [0505 1tV] is thestage 1 operating time in seconds. If set to inverse, the value of cell [0506 1V(tms)] is the time multiplier setting (TMS). The corresponding operating time (t) inseconds is given by:

t =TMS

M –1 where

M =Applied voltage

Relay setting voltage (Vs)

5.3.4 Check the thermal withstand

The relays voltage inputs have been designed to withstand 2Vn continuously or2.6Vn for 10 seconds, where Vn = 110V or 415/440V. Before performing thetests, it should be checked that the thermal withstand is not going to be exceededas this could cause permanent damage to the relay.

5.3.5 Perform test

Reset the timer.

Apply the test voltage to the relay and record the time displayed on the timer.

The operating time should be the time calculated in step 3 ±2% or 50 milliseconds,whichever is the greater.

Section 6. WIRING VERIFICATION TEST

Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any externalwiring that has been removed to allow testing.

If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay inorder to perform any of the above tests, it should be ensured that all connectionsare replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or schemediagram.

The following on-load measuring test ensures that the external (customer) wiring tothe voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictionspreventing the energisation of the plant being protected.

Measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure that they arecorrectly rated and check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phaserotation meter.

Page 158: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 12 of 21

If a KVFG 122 that is configured to measure Vo (ie. an open-delta voltagetransformer winding connected to terminals 21 and 22) is being tested, it may notbe possible to check the phase rotation.

Compare the values of the secondary voltages with the relay’s measured values,which can be found in the MEASURE 1 menu column.

If the voltage transformer ratio settings (cells [0402 VT Ratio] and [0502 VT Ratio]for residual and phase voltages respectively) are set to 1:1, the displayed valuesare in secondary Volts. The relay values should be within 1% of the appliedsecondary voltages.

Otherwise, if the voltage transformer ratio settings (cells [0402 VT Ratio] and[0502 VT Ratio] for residual and phase voltages respectively) are set greater than1:1, the displayed values are in primary Volts. In this case the relay values will beequal to the applied secondary voltages multiplied by the appropriate voltagetransformer ratio setting and should be within the 1% tolerance.

It should be noted that no residual voltage will be measured under normal loadconditions. It will therefore be necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault tocheck the voltage transformer wiring.

Section 7. FINAL CHECKS

The tests are now complete.

Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary todisconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiringverification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced inaccordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.

If the circuit breaker operations counter should be zero, reset it using cell[0310 CB ops].

If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB 01 test plug and replace theMMLG cover so that the protection is restored to service.

Replace the cover on the KVFG.

Ensure that all alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay.

Section 8. PROBLEM SOLVING

8.1 Password lost or not accepted

Relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA.

Only uppercase letters are accepted.

Password can be changed by the user, see Chapter 3, Section 3.

There is an additional unique recovery password associated with the relay whichcan be supplied by the factory, or service agent, if given details of it’s serialnumber.

The serial number will be found in cell [0008 Serial No.] and should correspond tothe number on the label at the top right hand corner of the frontplate of the relay.If they differ, quote the one in cell [0008 Serial No.].

Page 159: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 13 of 21

8.2 Protection settings

8.2.1 Settings for neutral voltage displacement protection function not displayed

For Group 1 settings:

Set cell [0401 ND Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0401 ND Links] link 1 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Set cell [0401 ND Links] link 2 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 3 settings.

For Group 2 settings:

Set cell [0801 ND Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0801 ND Links] link 1 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Set cell [0801 ND Links] link 2 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 3 settings.

8.2.2 Settings for under/overvoltage protection function not displayed

For Group 1 settings:

Set cell [0501 VF Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0501 VF Links] link 3 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Set cell [0501 VF Links] link 6 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 3 settings.

Set cell [0501 VF Links] link 9 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 4 settings.

For Group 2 settings:

Set cell [0901 VF Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0901 VF Links] link 3 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Set cell [0901 VF Links] link 6 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 3 settings.

Set cell [0901 VF Links] link 9 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 4 settings.

8.2.3 Settings for under/overfrequency protection function not displayed

For Group 1 settings:

Set cell [0601 FF Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0601 FF Links] link 2 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Set cell [0601 FF Links] link 4 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 3 settings.

Set cell [0601 FF Links] link 6 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 4 settings.

For Group 2 settings:

Set cell [0A01 FF Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0A01 FF Links] link 2 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Set cell [0A01 FF Links] link 4 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 3 settings.

Set cell [0A01 FF Links] link 6 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 4 settings.

8.2.4 Settings for negative sequence overvoltage protection function not displayed

For Group 1 settings:

Set cell [0701 NS Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0701 NS Links] link 1 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

Page 160: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 14 of 21

For Group 2 settings:

Set cell [0B01 NS Links] link 0 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 1 settings.

Set cell [0B01 NS Links] link 1 to ‘1’ to turn on stage 2 settings.

8.2.5 Second setting group not displayed

Set cell [0003 SD Links] link 4 to ‘1’ to turn on the Group 2 settings.

8.2.6 Function links can not be changed

Enter the password in cell [0002 Password] as these menu cells are protected.

Links are not selectable if associated text is not displayed.

8.2.7 Curve selection can not be changed

Enter the password in cell [0002 Password] as these menu cells are protected.

Curves may not have been selectable in the particular relay.

8.3 Alarms

If the watchdog relay operates, first check that the relay is energised from theauxiliary supply. If it is, try to determine the cause of the problem by examining thealarm flags in cell [0022 Alarms]. This will not be possible if the display is notresponding to key presses. Having attempted to determine the cause of the alarm itmay be possible to return the relay to an operable state by resetting it. To do this,remove the auxiliary power supply from the relay for approximately 10 secondsbefore re-establishing the supply. The relay should return to an operating state.

Re-check the alarm status in cell [0022 Alarms] if the alarm LED is still indicatingan alarm state. The following notes will give guidance:

8.3.1 Watchdog alarm

The watchdog output relay will pick up when the KVFG is operational to indicate ahealthy state, with it’s “normally open” contact closed. When an alarm conditionthat requires some action to be taken is detected, the watchdog relay resets andit’s “normally closed” contact will close to give an alarm.

Note: The green LED will usually follow the operation of the watchdog relay.

There is no shorting contact across the case terminals connected to the “normallyclosed” contact of the watchdog relay. Therefore, the indication for a failed/healthy relay will be cancelled when the relay is removed from it’s case.

If the relay is still functioning, the actual problem causing the alarm can be foundfrom the alarm records in cell [0022 Alarms] (see Chapter 3, Section 7.1).

8.3.2 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 0 = ‘1’

For an ‘Uncfg’ configuration alarm, the protection is stopped and no longerperforming it’s intended function as there will be an error in the factoryconfiguration settings.

To return the relay to a serviceable state, the initial factory configuration will haveto be reloaded and the relay re-calibrated. It is recommended that the work becarried out at the factory, or entrusted to an approved service centre.

Page 161: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 15 of 21

8.3.3 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 1 = ‘1’

For an ‘Uncalib’ calibration alarm, the protection will still be operational but therewill be an error in it’s calibration that will require attention. It may be left runningprovided the error does not cause any problems with incorrect tripping.

To return the relay to a serviceable state, the initial factory configuration will haveto be reloaded and the relay re-calibrated. It is recommended that the work becarried out at the factory, or entrusted to an approved service centre.

8.3.4 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 2 = ‘1’

A ‘Setting’ alarm indicates that the area of non-volatile memory where the selectedprotection settings are stored has been corrupted. The current settings should bechecked against those applied at the commissioning stage or any later changesthat have been made.

If a personal computer (PC) is used during commissioning then it is recommendedthat the final settings applied to the relay are copied to a floppy disk with the serialnumber of the relay used as the file name. The settings can then be readily loadedback into the relay if necessary, or to a replacement relay.

8.3.5 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 3 = ‘1’

The ‘No Service’ alarm flag can only be observed when the relay is in thecalibration or configuration mode when the protection program will be stopped.

8.3.6 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 4 = ‘1’

The ‘No Samples’ alarm flag indicates that there is no output from the analogue todigital convertor, although the relay will remain in service. If this flag should be setto ‘1’, please contact the factory or an approved service centre for advice.

8.3.7 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 5 = ‘1’

The ‘No Fourier’ alarm flag indicates that the Fourier analysis algorithm is nolonger running. If this flag should be set to ‘1’, please contact the factory or anapproved service centre for advice.

8.3.8 Cell [0022 Alarms] link 7 = ‘1’

The ‘CB ops’ alarm flag indicates that, since the operations counter was last reset,the circuit breaker has operated the number of times that has been set in cell[0C07 CB Ops>].

The circuit breaker operations counter can be viewed and reset using cell [0310CB ops].

8.3.9 Fault flags will not reset

These flags can only be reset when the flags Fn are being displayed or by resettingthe fault records (cell [0110 Clear=0]). For more details refer to Chapter 3, Section4.15.

8.4 Records

8.4.1 Problems with event records

Fault records will only be generated if RLY3 is operated because this is the triggerto store the records.

Fault records can be generated in response to another protection operating if oneof it’s trip contacts is used to operate RLY3 via an opto-isolated input on theK Relay. This will result in the fault values, as measured by the K Relay, being

Page 162: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 16 of 21

stored at the instant RLY3 resets. The flag display (cell [0102 Fn G1]) will include aflag to identify the opto-isolated input that initiated the record.

Fault currents recorded are lower than actual values, as the fault is interruptedbefore measurement is completed.

Few fault records can be stored when changes in the state of logic inputs and relayoutputs are stored in the event records. These inputs and outputs can generatemany events for each fault occurrence and limit the total number of faults that canbe stored. Setting function link [0003 SD Links] link 7 to ‘0’ will turn off this featureand allow the maximum number of fault records to be stored.

The event records are erased if the auxiliary supply to the relay is lost for a periodexceeding the hold-up time of the internal power supply.

Events can only be read via the serial communication port and not on the LCD.

Any spare opto-isolated inputs may be used to log changes of state of externalcontacts in the event record buffer of the K Relay. The opto-isolated input does nothave to be assigned to a particular function in order to achieve this (ie. it does nothave to be assigned in any of the input masks).

The oldest event is overwritten by the next event to be stored when the bufferbecomes full.

When a master station has successfully read a record, it usually clears itautomatically. When all records have been read, the event bit in the status bytewithin the master station program is set to ‘0’ to indicate that there are no longerany records to be retrieved.

8.4.2 Problems with disturbance records

Only one record can be held in the buffer and the recorder must be reset beforeanother record can be stored. Automatic reset can be achieved by setting cell[0003 SD Links] link 6 to ‘1’. Once the disturbance recorder has stopped, it willreset after the auxiliary 1 timer setting (cell [0C02 tAUX1]).

The disturbance records are erased if the auxiliary supply to the relay is lost for aperiod exceeding the hold-up time of the internal power supply.

Disturbance records can only be read via the serial communication port. It is notpossible to display them on the LCD.

No trigger has been selected in cells [0F04 Logic Trig] or [0F05 Relay trig] toinitiate the storing of a disturbance record.

The disturbance recorder is automatically reset after the auxiliary 1 timer setting(cell [0C02 tAUX1]) following stopping of the recorder. Change cell [0003 SDLinks] link 6 to ‘0’ to select manual reset.

Post trigger (cell [0F03 Post Trigger]) is set to maximum value. Thus, the relay ismissing the fault.

When a master station has successfully read a record, it will clear the recordautomatically and the disturbance record bit in the status byte within the masterstation program will then be set to ‘0’ to indicate that there is no longer a record tobe retrieved.

Page 163: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 17 of 21

8.5 Circuit breaker operation counter

When a replacement KVFG is fitted, it may be desirable to increment the circuitbreaker operation counter (count displayed in cell [0310 CB ops]) to the value onthe old relay. The counter can be incremented manually by operating the outputrelay allocated for circuit breaker tripping the required number of times.

The circuit breaker operation counter is not incremented when another protectiontrips the circuit breaker. Add a trip input from the other protection to an opto-isolated input of the K Relay and arrange for output relay RLY3 or RLY7 to operateinstantaneously in response to the input.

8.6 Communications

An address (cell [000B Rly Address]) can not be automatically allocated if theremote change of setting has been inhibited by cell [0003 SD Links] link 0 beingset to ‘0’. This must be set to ‘1’ for remote setting changes to be enabled.Alternatively, the address must be entered manually via the user interface on therelay.

An address (cell [000B Rly Address]) can not be allocated automatically unless theaddress is first manually set to ‘0’. This can be achieved by a global commandincluding the serial number of the relay.

Relay address is set to 255, the global address for which no replies are permitted.

8.6.1 Measured values do not change

Values in the MEASURE 1 and MEASURE 2 columns of the menu are snap-shots ofthe values at the time they were requested. To obtain a value that varies with themeasured quantity, it should be added to the poll list as described in the usermanual for the access software being used.

8.6.2 Relay no longer responding

Check if other relays that are further along the bus are responding. If this is thecase, the relay’s communication processor should be reset by removing theauxiliary supply from the relay for at least 10 seconds before re-energising it.This should not be necessary as the reset operation occurs automatically when therelay detects a loss of communication.

If relays further along the bus are not communicating, check to find out which areresponding to the master station. If some are responding, the position of the breakin the bus can be determined by deduction. If none is responding, check for dataon the bus or reset the communication port driving the bus with requests.

Check there are not two relays with the same address (cell [000B Rly Address]) onthe bus.

8.6.3 No response to remote control commands

Check that cell [0003 SD Links] link 0 is not set to ‘0’ as this will inhibit the relayfrom responding to remote commands. If this is the case set cell [0003 SD Links]link 0 to ‘1’; a password will be required.

System data function link settings can not be performed over the communicationlink if the remote change of settings has been inhibited by setting cell [0003 SDLinks] link 0 to ‘0’. Change [0003 SD Links] link 0 to ‘1’ manually via the userinterface on the relay first.

Relay is not identified in the Circuit Breaker Control Menu of the Protection AccessSoftware and Toolkit if two auxiliary circuit breaker contacts have not been

Page 164: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 18 of 21

connected to the opto-isolated inputs of the relay to indicate it’s position via thePlant Status Word (cell [000C Plnt Status]). Check input masks [0D15 CB Closed]and [0D16 CB Open] for correct opto-isolator allocations, and the connections tothe auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.

8.7 Output relays remain picked up

Relays remain picked up when de-selected by link or mask.

If an output relay is operated at the time it is de-selected, either due to a softwarelink change or by de-selecting it in an output mask, it may remain operated untilthe K Relay is powered down and up again. After such changes, it is advisable toremove the auxiliary supply from the relay for at least 10 seconds before re-energising it.

Section 9. MAINTENANCE

9.1 Remote testing

K-Range Midos relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance thanearlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedialaction can be taken. However, some periodic tests could be done to ensure thatthe relay is functioning correctly. If the relay can be communicated with from aremote point, via it’s serial port, then some testing can be carried out withoutactually visiting the site.

9.1.1 Alarms

The alarm status should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist.The alarm records (cell [0022 Alarms]) can then be read to identify the nature ofany alarm that may exist.

9.1.2 Measurement accuracy

The values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values tocheck that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are, then theanalogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly.

9.1.3 Trip test

If the relay is configured to provide remote control of the circuit breaker then a triptest can be performed remotely in several ways:

1. Read the measured voltages in the MEASURE 1 column and adjust the under/overvoltage function stage 1 setting (cell [0503 1V]) so that it operates after it’stime delay.

The settings can then be returned to their usual value and the circuit breaker re-closed.

Note: If setting group 2 is not being used for any other purpose, it could beused for this test by having the test setting pre-selected and issuing acommand to change the setting group that is in use to initiate thetripping sequence.

2. If the relay is connected for remote control of the circuit breaker then a trip/close cycle can be performed. This method will not check as much of thefunctional circuitry of the relay as the previous method but it will not need thesettings of the relay to be changed.

Page 165: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 19 of 21

If a failure to trip occurs, view cell [0021 Rly Status] whilst the test is repeated.This will check that the output relay is being commanded to operate.

If the trip test is being performed using a trip/close cycle, the output relay assignedin cell [0E16 CB Trip] should operate and not the main trip relay used by theprotection functions.

If the assigned output relay is not responding then an output relay allocated to aless essential function may be re-allocated to the trip function to effect a temporaryrepair. However, a visit may be needed to effect a wiring change. See Chapter 3,Section 4.14 for details on how to set relay masks.

9.1.4 Circuit breaker operations counter

The number of circuit breaker operations can be obtained at this time by readingcell [0310 CB ops]).

9.2 Local testing

When testing locally, similar tests to those for remote testing may be carried out tocheck for correct functioning of the relay.

9.2.1 Alarms

The alarm status LED should be checked first to identify if any alarm conditionsexist. The alarm records (cell [0022 Alarms]) can then be read to identify thenature of any alarm that may exist.

9.2.2 Measurement accuracy

The values measured by the relay can be checked against known values of voltageapplied to the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in Section 6 of thischapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.

9.2.3 Trip test

If the relay is configured to provide a trip test via it’s user interface then this shouldbe performed to test the output trip relays. If the relay is configured for remotecontrol of the circuit breaker, the trip test will initiate the remote circuit breaker triprelay (assigned in cell [0E16 CB Trip] and not the main trip relay used by theprotection functions. In this case the main trip relay should be tested by adjustingthe under/overvoltage protection function stage 1 setting (cell [0503 1V]) so that itoperates after it’s time delay. Afterwards, the settings must be returned to theirusual value.

Note: If setting group 2 is not being used for any other purpose, it could be usedfor this test by having the test setting pre-selected and changing the settinggroup that is in use to initiate the tripping sequence.

If the assigned output relay is not responding then an output relay allocated to aless essential function may be re-allocated to the trip function to effect a temporaryrepair. See Chapter 3, Section 4.14 for details on how to set relay masks.

9.2.4 Circuit breaker operations counter

The number of circuit breaker operations can be obtained at this time by readingcell [0310 CB ops]).

9.2.5 Additional tests

Additional tests can be selected from the Commissioning Instructions as required.

Page 166: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 20 of 21

9.3 Method of repair

Please read the “Safety Section” and Chapter 2, “Handling and Installation”,before proceeding with this work. This will ensure that no further damage is causedby incorrect handling of the electronic components.

9.3.1 Replacing a pcb

Recalibration is not usually required when a pcb is replaced unless it happens tobe the left-hand board of the two that plug directly on to the left hand terminalblock as this one directly affect the calibration.

9.3.1.1 Replacement of user interface

Withdraw the module from its case.

Remove the four screws that are placed one at each corner of the front plate.

Remove the front plate.

Lever the top edge of the user interface board forwards to unclip it from itsmounting.

Pull the pcb upwards to unplug it from the connector at its lower edge.

Replace with a new interface board and re-assemble in the reverse order.

9.3.1.2 Replacement of main processor board

This is the pcb at the extreme left of the module, when viewed from the front.

To replace this board:

First remove the screws holding the side screen in place. There are two screwsthrough the top plate of the module and two more through the base plate.

Remove screen to expose the pcb.

Remove the two retaining screws, one at the top edge and the other directly belowit on the lower edge of the pcb.

Separate the pcb from the sockets at the front edge of the board. Note that theyare a tight fit and will require levering apart, taking care to ease the connectorsapart gradually so as not to crack the front pcb card. The connectors are designedfor ease of assembly in manufacture and not for continual dismantling of the unit.

Re-assemble in the reverse order of the above sequence, making sure that thescreen plate is replaced with all four screws securing it.

9.3.1.3 Replacement of auxiliary expansion board

This is the second board in from the left hand side of the module.

Remove the processor board as described in 9.3.1.2 above.

Remove the two securing screws that hold the auxiliary expansion board in place.

Unplug the pcb from the front bus as described for the processor board andwithdraw.

Replace in the reverse order of the above sequence, making sure that the screenplate is replaced with all four screws securing it.

9.3.2 Replacing output relays

The main processor and auxiliary expansion boards are removed and replaced asdescribed in Sections 9.3.1.2 and 9.3.1.3 above respectively.

Page 167: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Chapter 8

Page 21 of 21

It should be noted when replacing output relays that the pcb’s have through platedholes. Care must therefore be taken not to damage these holes when a componentis removed, otherwise solder may not flow through the hole to make a goodconnection to the tracks on the component side of the pcb.

9.3.3 Replacing the power supply board

Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the top plate ofthe module.

Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the bottom plateof the module.

Unplug the back plane from the power supply board.

Remove the securing screws at the top and bottom of the power supply board.

Withdraw the power supply board from the rear, unplugging it from the front bus.

Re-assemble in the reverse order of the above sequence.

9.3.4 Replacing the back plane

Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the top plate ofthe module.

Remove the two screws securing the right hand terminal block to the bottom plateof the module.

Unplug the back plane from the power supply board.

Twist outwards and around to the side of the module.

Replace the pcb and terminal block assembly.

Re-assemble in the reverse order of the above sequence.

9.4 Recalibration

Recalibration is not usually required when a pcb is replaced unless it happens tobe the left-hand board of the two that plug directly on to the left hand terminalblock as this one directly affects the calibration.

Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires test equipmentwith suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It istherefore recommended that the work is carried out at the factory, or entrusted toan approved service centre.

After calibration, the relay will need to have all the settings required for theapplication re-entered if a replacement board has been fitted. Therefore, it is usefulif a copy of the settings is available on floppy disk. Although this is not essential, itcan reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time the protectionis out of service.

Page 168: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 169: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Appendix 1Logic Diagrams

Page 170: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 171: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Figure 1. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 122 – Sheet 1 1

Figure 2. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 122 – Sheet 2 2

Figure 3. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 122 – Sheet 3 3

Figure 4. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 142 – Sheet 1 4

Figure 5. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 142 – Sheet 2 5

Figure 6. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 142 – Sheet 3 6

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Contents

Page 172: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 173: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Page 1 of 6

Figure 1. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 122 – Sheet 1

&

&

&

&4tV

3tF

2tF

4tF

1tVo

2tVo

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

VF101

VF001

VF10

1

VF301

VF40

1

ND001

ND101

FF70

1

FF50

1

SDA0

1

FF30

1

FF10

1

VFD01

VFA0

1

VFA01

VF70

1

FF201

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

3tV

FF601

VF401

VF701

VF601

VF901

FF001

FF401

1tV

2tV

1tF

VF21

0

VF51

0

VF81

0

VFB1

0

OEO2 2tVo

OEO1 1tVo

OE13 4tF

OE12 3tF

OE11 2tF

OE10 1tF

OEOF 4tVc (–a)

OEOE 4tVb (–c)

OEOD 4tVa (–b)

OEOC 3tVc (–a)

OEOB 3tVb (–c)

OEOA 3tVa (–b)

OEO9 2tVc (–a)

OEO8 2tVb (–c)

OEO7 2tVa (–b)

OEO4 1tVa (–b)

OEO5 1tVb (–c)

OEO6 1tVc (–a)

ODO4 Blk 1tV

ODO5 Blk 2tV

ODO6 Blk 3tV

ODO7 Blk 4tV

ODO8 Blk 1tF

ODO9 Blk 2tF

ODOA Blk 3tF

ODOB Blk 4tF

ODO1 Blk 1tVo

ODO2 Blk 2tVo

4V

3V

2V

1V

Va (–b)<

Va (–c)< &

STAGE 1UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 2UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 3UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

UNDERVOLTAGEBLOCKING FORV&F ELEMENTS

STAGE 4UNDER/OVERVOLTAGESDA

01

SDA01

SDA01

SDA01

STAGE 1UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 2UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 3UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 4UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 1NEUTRALVOLTAGEDISPLACEMENT

STAGE 2NEUTRALVOLTAGEDISPLACEMENT

SDA01

SDA01

+

>1

>1

>1

>1

1F

2F

3F

4F

1Vo

2Vo

Page 174: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Page 2 of 6

Figure 2. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 122 – Sheet 2

STAGE 3NEUTRAL VOLTAGEDISPLACEMENT

STAGE 1NEGATIVE SEQUENCEOVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 2NEGATIVE SEQUENCEOVERVOLTAGE

CIRCUIT BREAKERCONTROL

FAULT RECORD& FLAG LATCHINITIATION

DISTURBANCERECORDERRESET

AUXILIARYTIMERS

SETTING GROUPCONTROL

LOAD SHEDDINGPLANT STATUS

CIRCUITBREAKER ALARM

CHANGE TOSETTING GROUP 2

RESET DISTURBANCERECORDER

RESET TRIP FLAGS

GENERATE CIRCUIT BREAKERMAINTENANCE RECORDS

LATCH RED TRIP LEDLATCH FLAGS

GENERATE FAULT RECORD &COPY TO EVENT RECORDS

Trip Circuit Breaker

Close Circuit Breaker

Remote Set Grp2

Remote Set Grp1

tAUX1

tAUX2

tAUX3

RecorderStopped

PLANTSTATUSWORD

SET

RESET

OD17 Bus 2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFSD

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFND1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFND2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFLOG

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFVF2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFFF1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFNS1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEFNS2

VF1 FF2

ND201

NS001

NS101

SD201

LOG601

SD801

SD301

LOG701

Load Shed Level 3

Load Shed Level 2

Load Shed Level 1

SD401

LOG50

1

LOG30

1

SD801

SD501

NS201

SD901

SDA01

SDA10

SDA10

&

&

&

3tVo

1tV2

2tV2

tTRIP

tCLOSERESET

>1

>1

>1

>1

>1

ODO3 Blk 3tVo

ODOC Blk 1tV2

ODOD Blk 2tV2

3Vo

1V2

2V2

ODO3 3tVo

OE14 1tV2

OE15 2tV2

OE16 CB Trip

OE17 CB Close

RecorderStopped

OE18 Aux1

OE19 Aux2

OE1A Aux3

OE1B Level 1

OE1C Level 2

OE1D Level 3

OE1E CB Alarm

OD16 CB Open

OD15 CB Closed

OD14 Set Grp2

OD13 Aux3

OD12 Aux2

OD11 Aux1

RLY7

RLY3

OD10 Ext Trip

ODOF L Close

ODOE L Trip

V2 CI BI

-+

>1

>1

Page 175: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Page 3 of 6

Figure 3. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 122 – Sheet 3

FUNCTION LINK SETTINGS

LINK NUMBER F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0SD Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ND1 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ND2 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0VF1 Fn Links 0 0 0VF2 Fn. Links 0 0 0FF1 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0FF2 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0NS1 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0NS2 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0LOG Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

LOGIC SETTINGS

TIMER tAUX1 TIMER tCLOSETIMER tAUX2 CB Ops>TIMER tAUX 3 DisplayTIMER tTRIP

RECORDER SETTINGS

REC ControlREC CaptureREC Post Trigger

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0REC Logic trig 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0REC Relay trig 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYS PasswordSYS DescriptionSYS Plant Ref.SYS FrequencySYS Rly AddressSYS CB Control

PROTECTION SETTINGS

SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2Neut. Disp 1 UV/OV 1 UF/OF 1 Neg Seq 1 Neut Disp 2 UV/OV 2 UF/OF 2 Neg Seq 2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS2VT Ratio VT Ratio 1F 1V2 VT Ratio VT Ratio 1F 1V2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21Vo 1V 1tF 1V2Char 1Vo 1V 1tF 1V2CharND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21VoChar 1VChar 2F 1tV2 1VoChar 1VChar 2F 1tV2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21tVo 1tV 2tF 1V2(tms) 1tVo 1tV 2tF 1V2(tms)ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21Vo(tms) 1V(tms) 3F 2V2 1Vo(tms) 1V(tms) 3F 2V2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS22Vo 2V 3tF 2V2Char 2Vo 2V 3tF 2V2CharND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS22VoChar 2VChar 4F 2tV2 2VoChar 2VChar 4F 2tV2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS22tVo 2tV 4tF 2V2(tms) 2tVo 2tV 4tF 2V2(tms)ND1 UV/OV1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 NS22Vo(tms) 2V(tms) V2 CI BI 2Vo(tms) 2V(tms) V2 CI BIND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23Vo 3V 3Vo 3VND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23VoChar 3VChar 3VoChar 3VCharND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23tVo 3tV 3tVo 3tVND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23Vo(tms) 3V(tms) 3Vo(tms) 3V(tms)

UV/OV1 UV/OV24V 4VUV/OV1 UV/OV24VChar 4VCharUV/OV1 UV/OV24tV 4tVUV/OV1 UV/OV24V(tms) 4V(tms)

Page 176: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Page 4 of 6

Figure 4. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 142 – Sheet 1

VF101

VF001

VF10

1VF401

VF301

VF40

1VF701

VF601

VF70

1VFA01

VF901

VFA0

1VFD01

FF001

FF101

FF201

FF301

FF401

FF501

FF601

FF701

ND001

ND101

2Vo

1V0

4F

3F

2F

1F

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0OE02 2tVo

OE01 1tVo

OE13 4tF

OE12 3tF

OE11 2tF

OE10 1tF

OEOF 4tVc (–a)

OEOE 4tVb (–c)

OEOD 4tVa (–b)

OEOC 3tVc (–a)

OEOB 3tVb (–c)

OEOA 3tVa (–b)

OEO9 2tVc (–a)

OEO8 2tVb (–c)

OEO7 2tVa (–b)

OEO6 1tVc (–a)

OEO5 1tVb (c)

OEO4 1tVa (–b)OD04 Blk 1tV

OD05 Blk 2tV

OD06 Blk 3tV

OD07 Blk 4tV

OD08 Blk 1tV

OD09 Blk 2tF

ODOA Blk 3tF

ODOB Blk 4tF

OD01 Blk 1tVo

OD02 Blk 2tVo

4V

3V

2V

1V1tV

1tF

3tV

4tV

1tF

2tF

3tF

4tF

1tVo

2tVo&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

& &

&

&

&

VF21

0

VF51

0

VF81

VFB1

0

0

>1

>1

>1

>1

STAGE 3UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 1UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 2UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 4UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

UNDERVOLTAGEBLOCKING FORV&F ELEMENTS

STAGE 1UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 2UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 3UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 4UNDER/OVERFREQUENCY

STAGE 1NEUTRALVOLTAGEDISPLACEMENT

STAGE 2NEUTRALVOLTAGEDISPLACEMENT

Va (–b)<

Vb (–c)<

Vc (–a)<

+

Page 177: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Page 5 of 6

Figure 5. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 142 – Sheet 2

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

OD03 Blk 3tVo

OD0C Blk 1tV2

OD0D Blk 2tV2

Trip Circuit Breaker

Close Circuit Breaker

OD0E L Trip

OD0F L Close

OD10 Ext Trip

OD11 Aux1

OD12 Aux2

OD13 Aux3

OD14 Set Grp2

OD15 CB Closed

OD16 CB Open

OD17 Bus 2

OE03 3tVo

OE14 1tV2

OE15 2tV2

OE16 CB Trip

OE17 CB Close

RESET TRIP FLAGS

RESET DISTURBANCERECORDER

OE18 Aux1

OE19 Aux2

OE1A Aux3

CHANGE TO SETTINGGROUP 2

OE1B Level 1

OE1C Level 2

OE1D Level 3

OE1E CB Alarm

Load Shed Level 3

Load Shed Level 2

Load Shed Level 1

GENERATE CIRCUIT BREAKERMAINTENANCE RECORDS

LATCH RED TRIP LEDLATCH FLAGS

GENERATE FAULT RECORD &COPY TO EVENT RECORDS

RESET

&

&

&

3tVo

2tV2

2tV2

tTRIP

tCLOSE

ND201

NS001

NS101

SD201

NS201

V2 CI BI

LOG601

SD801

SD301

LOG701

PLANTSTATUSWORD

Remote Reset Grp1

Remote Reset Grp2 SET

RESET

tAUX3

tAUX2

tAUX1

>1

>1

>1

>1

>1

>1

RLY3

RLY7

RecorderStopped

2V2

1V2

3V0

SD901

>1

SD501

SD801

LOG31

0

LOG51

0SD4

01

RecorderStopped

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 089ABCDEF

SD

ND1

ND2

LOG

VF1

VF2

FF1

FF2

NS1

NS2

STAGE 3NEUTRAL VOLTAGEDISPLACEMENT

STAGE 1NEGATIVE SEQUENGEOVERVOLTAGE

STAGE 2NEGATIVE SEQUENGEOVERVOLTAGE

FAULT RECORD& FLAG LATCHINITIATION

CIRCUIT BREAKERCONTROL

DISTURBANCERECORDERRESET

AUXILIARYTIMERS

SETTING GROUPCONTROL

LOAD SHEDDINGPLANT STATUS

CIRCUIT BREAKERALARM

+ –

CB (ops)>

Page 178: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 1

Page 6 of 6

Figure 6. Scheme logic diagram KVFG 142 – Sheet 3

FUNCTION LINK SETTINGS

LINK NUMBER F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0SD Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ND1 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ND2 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0VF1 Fn Links 0 0 0VF2 Fn. Links 0 0 0FF1 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0FF2 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0NS1 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0NS2 Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0LOG Fn. Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

LOGIC SETTINGS

TIMER tAUX1 TIMER tCLOSETIMER tAUX2 CB Ops>TIMER tAUX 3 DisplayTIMER tTRIP

RECORDER SETTINGS

REC ControlREC CaptureREC Post Trigger

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0REC Logic trig 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0REC Relay trig 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SYSTEM SETTINGS

SYS PasswordSYS DescriptionSYS Plant Ref.SYS FrequencySYS Rly AddressSYS CB Control

PROTECTION SETTINGS

SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2Neut. Disp 1 UV/OV 1 UF/OF 1 Neg Seq 1 Neut Disp 2 UV/OV 2 UF/OF 2 Neg Seq 2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS2VT Ratio VT Ratio 1F 1V2 VT Ratio VT Ratio 1F 1V2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21Vo 1V 1tF 1V2Char 1Vo 1V 1tF 1V2CharND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21VoChar 1VChar 2F 1tV2 1VoChar 1VChar 2F 1tV2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21tVo 1tV 2tF 1V2(tms) 1tVo 1tV 2tF 1V2(tms)ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS21Vo(tms) 1V(tms) 3F 2V2 1Vo(tms) 1V(tms) 3F 2V2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS22Vo 2V 3tF 2V2Char 2Vo 2V 3tF 2V2CharND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS22VoChar 2VChar 4F 2tV2 2VoChar 2VChar 4F 2tV2ND1 UV/OV1 UF/OF1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 UF/OF2 NS22tVo 2tV 4tF 2V2(tms) 2tVo 2tV 4tF 2V2(tms)ND1 UV/OV1 NS1 ND2 UV/OV2 NS22Vo(tms) 2V(tms) V2 CI BI 2Vo(tms) 2V(tms) V2 CI BIND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23Vo 3V 3Vo 3VND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23VoChar 3VChar 3VoChar 3VCharND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23tVo 3tV 3tVo 3tVND1 UV/OV1 ND2 UV/OV23Vo(tms) 3V(tms) 3Vo(tms) 3V(tms)

UV/OV1 UV/OV24V 4VUV/OV1 UV/OV24VChar 4VCharUV/OV1 UV/OV24tV 4tVUV/OV1 UV/OV24V(tms) 4V(tms)

Page 179: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Appendix 2Connection Diagrams

Page 180: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 181: AREVA KVFG R8559C

1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR CUSTOMISING 1

Figure 1. Typical application diagram. Phase-phase or phase-neutral voltagemeasurement with residual voltage measurement 1

Figure 2. Typical application diagram. 3 phase voltage measurement with calculatedresidual voltage. 2

Figure 3. Typical application diagram. 2 phase-phase and residual voltagemeasurement. 3

Figure 4. Typical application diagram. Phase-phase voltage measurement(no residual voltage measurement) 4

2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR RELAYS AS SUPPLIED 5

Figure 5. Typical application diagram. Phase-phase or phase-neutral voltagemeasurement with residual voltage measurement 5

Figure 6. Typical application diagram. 3 phase voltage measurement withcalculated residual voltage. 6

Figure 7. Typical application diagram. 2 phase-phase and residual voltagemeasurement. 7

Figure 8. Typical application diagram. Phase-phase voltage measurement(no residual voltage measurement) 8

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Contents

Page 182: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 183: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 1 of 8

Section 1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR CUSTOMISING

Figu

re 1

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. Pha

se-p

hase

or p

hase

-neu

tral v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent w

ith re

sidu

al v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

A

BC

A B CA

BC

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

2019 46 48 50 52

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32RL

0

34 36RL

1

38 40RL

2

42 44RL

3

Note

2

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1)

Note

3

KVFG

122

2221

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

Va/V

ab

Vo

da

dnN n

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

Resid

ual v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent r

equi

res

a5

limb

VT o

r 3 s

ingl

e ph

ase

VTs.

3

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

Page 184: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 2 of 8

Figu

re 2

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. 3 p

hase

vol

tage

mea

sure

men

t with

cal

cula

ted

resi

dual

vol

tage

.

A B CA

BC N n

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

17 2018 19 21 22 46 48 50 52 45 47 49 51 53 55

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32RL

0

34 36RL

1

38 40RL

2

42 44RL

3

29 31RL

4

33 35RL

5

37 39RL

6

41 43RL

7

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

Note

2

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1) L3 L4 L5 L6 L7

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(2)Note

3

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

KVFG

142

A

BC

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

Resid

ual v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent r

equi

res

a5

limb

VT o

r 3 s

ingl

e ph

ase

VTs.

3

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

Page 185: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 3 of 8

Figu

re 3

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. 2 p

hase

-pha

se a

nd re

sidu

al v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent.

A B CA

BC

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

17 2018 19 21 22 46 48 50 52 45 47 49 51 53 55

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32RL

0

34 36RL

1

38 40RL

2

42 44RL

3

29 31RL

4

33 35RL

5

37 39RL

6

41 43RL

7

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1) L3 L4 L5 L6 L7

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(2)

KVFG

142

Earth

ing TxZ GG

Note

2

Vo

N n

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

A

BC

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

Page 186: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 4 of 8

Figu

re 4

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. Pha

se-p

hase

vol

tage

mea

sure

men

t (no

resi

dual

vol

tage

mea

sure

men

t)

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

A

BC

A B CA

BC

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

46 48 50 52

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32RL

0

34 36RL

1

38 40RL

2

42 44RL

3

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1)

KVFG

122

Note

2

2019

Vbc

21 22

Vab

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

nN

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Page 187: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 5 of 8

Figu

re 5

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. Pha

se-p

hase

or p

hase

-neu

tral v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent w

ith re

sidu

al v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

A

BC

A B CA

BC

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

2019 46 48 50 52

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32UV

Indi

catio

n [1

tVa(

–b)]

34 36O

V Ind

icatio

n [3

tVa(

–b)]

38 40N

VD In

dica

tion

[1 tV

a]

42 44Tri

p [1

tVa(

–b)/

3 tVa

(–b)/

1 tVa

]

Note

2

L0 L1

Block

UV

[Blk

1tV]

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1)

Note

3

KVFG

122

2221

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

Va/V

ab

Vo

da

dnN n

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

Resid

ual v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent r

equi

res

a5

limb

VT o

r 3 s

ingl

e ph

ase

VTs.

3

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

L2

Chan

ge se

tting

grou

p

Exter

nal tr

ip

Section 2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR RELAYS ASSUPPLIED

Page 188: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 6 of 8

Figu

re 6

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. 3 p

hase

vol

tage

mea

sure

men

t with

cal

cula

ted

resi

dual

vol

tage

.

A B CA

BC N n

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

17 2018 19 21 22 46 48 50 52 45 47 49 51 53 55

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32UV

Indi

catio

n [1

tVa(–b

)/1t

Vb(–c

)/1t

Vc(–a

)]

34 36O

V Ind

icatio

n [3

tVa(–b

)/3t

Vb(–c

)/3t

Vc(–a

)]

38 40N

V Ind

icatio

n [1

tVa]

42 44Tri

p [1

tVa(–b

)/1t

Vb(–c

)/1t

Vc(–a

)/3t

Va(–b

/

3

tVb(

–c)/

3tVc

(–a] [

1tVo

/1tF/

3tF]

29 31UF

Indi

catio

n [1

tF]

33 35O

F Ind

icatio

n [3

tF]

37 39Co

ntrol

CB C

lose

41 43Co

ntrol

CB Tr

ip

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

Note

2

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1) L3 L4 L5 L6 L7

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(2)Note

3

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

KVFG

142

A

BC

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

Resid

ual v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent r

equi

res

a5

limb

VT o

r 3 s

ingl

e ph

ase

VTs.

3

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

Block

NVD

[Blk

1tVo

]

Block

UV/

UF [B

lk 1tV

/Blk

1tF]

Initia

te Au

xilia

ry Ti

mer 1

Initia

te Au

xilia

ry Ti

mer 1

CB C

losed

Indi

catio

n

Exter

nal T

rip

CB C

losed

Indi

catio

n

CB O

pen

Indica

tion

Page 189: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 7 of 8

Figu

re 7

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. 2 p

hase

-pha

se a

nd re

sidu

al v

olta

ge m

easu

rem

ent.

A B CA

BC

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

17 2018 19 21 22 46 48 50 52 45 47 49 51 53 55

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1) L3 L4 L5 L6 L7

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(2)

KVFG

142

Earth

ing TxZ GG

Note

2

Vo

N n

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

th

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

A

BC

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

Block

NVD

[Blk

1tVo

]

Block

UV/

UF [B

lk 1tV

/Blk

1tF]

Block

OV/

OF [

Blk 3

tV/B

lk 3t

F]

Initia

te Au

xilia

ry Ti

mer 1

Chan

ge S

etting

Gro

up

Exter

nal T

rip

CB C

losed

Indi

catio

n

CB O

pen

Indica

tion

UV In

dica

tion

[1tVa

(–b)/

1tVb

(–c)/

1tVc

(–a)]

OV

Indica

tion

[3tVa

(–b)/

3tVb

(–c)/

3tVc

(–a)]

NV

Indica

tion

[1tVa

]

Trip

[1tVa

(–b)/

1tVb

(–c)/

1tVc

(–a)/

3tVa

(–b/

3tV

b(–c

)/3t

Vc(–a

] [1t

Vo/1

tF/3t

F]

UF In

dica

tion

[1tF]

OF I

ndica

tion

[3tF]

Contr

ol CB

Clos

e

Contr

ol CB

Trip

Page 190: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 2

Page 8 of 8

Figu

re 8

.Ty

pica

l app

licat

ion

diag

ram

. Pha

se-p

hase

vol

tage

mea

sure

men

t (no

resi

dual

vol

tage

mea

sure

men

t)

Phas

e ro

tatio

n

A

BC

A B CA

BC

ab

c

13 14AC

/DC

supp

ly Vx

46 48 50 52

4 6Re

lay h

ealth

y

3 5Re

lay fa

iled

30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44

L0 L1 L2

Logi

c inp

ut co

mmon

(1)

KVFG

122

Note

2

2019

Vbc

21 22

Vab

54 56

SCN 7 8

K-Bu

s com

munic

atio

ns p

ort

+48V

field

volta

ge

Note

2

1

Case

ear

thco

nnec

tion

nN

Not

es: (a)

(d)

CT

shor

ting

links

mak

e be

fore

(b) a

nd (c

) disc

onne

ct.

Pin

term

inal

(pcb

type

).

1

Earth

con

nect

ions

are

typi

cal o

nly.

2

(c)

Long

term

inal

(b)

Shor

t ter

min

als

brea

k be

fore

(c).

3 54 6

1 7 98 10

31 3332 34

29 35 3736 3830

3940

4142

4344

4546

4748

4950

5152

5354

5556

1314

1718

1920

2122

SCN

Mod

ule te

rmin

al b

lock

svie

wed

from

rear

(with

integ

ral c

ase

earth

stra

p)

Case

ear

thUV

Indi

catio

n [1

tVa(–b

)/1t

Vb(–c

)/1t

Vc(–a

)]

OV

Indica

tion

[3tVa

(–b)/

3tVb

(–c)/

3tVc

(–a)]

CB A

larm

Trip

[1tVa

(–b)/

1tVb

(–c)/

1tVc

(–a)

3tV

b(–b

)/3t

Vb(–c

)/3t

Vc(–a

)]

Exter

nal T

rip

Block

UV

[Blk

1tV]

Chan

ge S

etting

Gro

up

Page 191: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Appendix 3Commissioning Test Record

Page 192: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 193: AREVA KVFG R8559C

1. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD 12. SETTING RECORD 5

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Contents

Page 194: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 195: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 1 of 14

Section 1. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Date

Station Circuit

System Frequency

Front plate information

Multifunctional voltage and frequency relay type KVFG 1__2

Model number

Serial number

Rated Current In

Auxiliary Voltage Vx

Polarising Voltage Vn

*Delete as appropriate

1 Introduction

Have all relevant safety instructions been followed? Yes/No*

Have the handling instructions been followed? Yes/No*

4 Product verification tests

4.1 With the relay de-energised

4.1.1 Visual inspection

Module or case damaged? Yes/No*

Model numbers on case and front plate match? Yes/No*

Serial numbers on case and front plate match? Yes/No*

Rating information correct? Yes/No*

Case earth installed? Yes/No*

4.1.2 Insulation resistance tested during commissioning? Yes/No*

If No, has insulation resistance been tested Yes/No*/Not required*

4.1.3 External wiring

Wiring checked against diagram (if available)? Yes/No*

Test block connections checked? Yes/No/na*

Page 196: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 2 of 14

4.1.4 Watchdog contacts

With auxiliary supply on Terminals 3 and 5 Open/Closed*

Terminals 4 and 6 Open/Closed*

4.2.2 Light emitting diodes

Relay healthy (green) LED working? Yes/No*

Alarm (yellow) LED working? Yes/No*

Trip (red) LED working? Yes/No*

4.2.3 Liquid crystal display

All pixels working? Yes/No*

Backlight switches on when key pressed? Yes/No*

Backlight switches off automatically Yes/No*

4.2.4 Field supply voltage ______V dc

4.2.5 Input opto-isolators

Input L0 working? Yes/No*

Input L1 working? Yes/No*

Input L2 working? Yes/No*

Input L3 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Input L4 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Input L5 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Input L6 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Input L7 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

4.2.6 Output relays

Output RL0 working? Yes/No*

Output RL1 working? Yes/No*

Output RL2 working? Yes/No*

Output RL3 working? Yes/No*

Output RL4 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Output RL5 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Output RL6 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

Output RL7 working? (KVFG 142 only) Yes/No/na*

4.2.7 K-Bus communications working? Yes/No/na*

Page 197: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 3 of 14

4.2.8 Voltage inputs

VT ratio (phase voltages) 10:1V

VT ratio (residual voltages) 10:1V/na*

Input VT Applied value Relay value

Va ___________V ___________V

Vb ___________V ___________V

Vc ___________V ___________V

Vo ___________V ___________V

5 Setting verification tests

5.1 Customer’s settings applied? Yes/No*

If settings applied using a portable computerand software, which software and version was used? ____________________

5.2 Settings on relay verified? Yes/No*

5.3 Under/overvoltage function stage 1 tested? Yes/No*

Protection function selected? UV/OV*

Applied voltage _________V

Expected operating time _________s

Actual operating time _________s

6 Wiring verification test

Temporary connections removed? Yes/No/na*

Disturbed wiring checked? Yes/No/na*

On-load test performed? Yes/No*

VT ratio (UV/OV function) ________/1V

VT secondary voltages: Measured value Relay value

A – N/A – B* ________V ________V

B – N/B – C* ________V ________V

C – N/C – A* ________V ________V

Residual ________V ________V

Phase rotation correct Yes/No*

Page 198: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 4 of 14

7 Final checks

Temporary connections removed? Yes/No/na*

Disturbed wiring checked? Yes/No/na*

MMLG 01 cover replaced? Yes/No/na*

KVFG cover replaced Yes/No*

Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness

Date Date

Page 199: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 5 of 14

Section 2. SETTING RECORD

Date Engineer

Station Date

Circuit System Frequency

Front plate information

Multifunctional voltage and frequency relay type KVFG 1__2

Model number

Serial number

Auxiliary Voltage Vx

Polarising Voltage Vn

0000 SYSTEM DATA F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0002 Password

0003 SD Links

0004 Description

0005 Plant

0006 Model

0008 Serial No.

0009 Frequency

000A Comms Level

000B Rly Address

0011 Software

Page 200: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 6 of 14

0400 NEUT DISP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0401 ND Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0402 VT Ratio

0403 1Vo

0404 1VoChar

0405 1tVo

0406 1Vo(tms)

0407 2Vo

0408 2VoChar

0409 2tVo

040A 2Vo(tms)

040B 3Vo

040C 3VoChar

040D 3tVo

040E 3Vo(tms)

Page 201: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 7 of 14

0500 UV/OV 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0501 VF Links 0 0

0502 VT Ratio

0503 1V

0504 1V Char

0505 1tV

0506 1V (tms)

0507 2V

0508 2V Char

0509 2tV

050A 2V (tms)

050B 3V

050C 3V Char

050D 3tV

050E 3V (tms)

050F 4V

0510 4V Char

0511 4tV

0512 4V (tms)

0600 UF/OF 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0601 FF Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0603 1F

0604 1tF

0605 2F

0606 2tF

0607 3F

0608 3tF

0609 4F

060A 4tF

Page 202: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 8 of 14

0700 NEG SEQ 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0701 NS Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0702 1V2

0703 1V2Char

0704 1tV2

0705 1V2(tms)

0706 2V2

0707 2V2Char

0708 2tV2

0709 2V2(tms)

070A V2 Cl Bl

0800 NEUT DISP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0801 ND Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0802 VT Ratio

0803 1Vo

0804 1VoChar

0805 1tVo

0806 1Vo(tms)

0807 2Vo

0808 2VoChar

0809 2tVo

080A 2Vo(tms)

080B 3Vo

080C 3VoChar

080D 3tVo

080E 3Vo(tms)

Page 203: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 9 of 14

0900 UV/OV 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0901 VF Links 0 0

0902 VT Ratio

0903 1V

0904 1V Char

0905 1tV

0906 1V (tms)

0907 2V

0908 2V Char

0909 2tV

090A 2V (tms)

090B 3V

090C 3V Char

090D 3tV

090E 3V (tms)

090F 4V

0910 4V Char

0911 4tV

0912 4V (tms)

Page 204: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 10 of 14

0A00 UF/OF 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0A01 FF Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0A03 1F

0A04 1tF

0A05 2F

0A06 2tF

0A07 3F

0A08 3tF

0A09 4F

0A0A 4tF

0B00 NEG SEQ 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0B01 NS Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0B02 1V2

0B03 1V2Char

0B04 1tV2

0B05 1V2(tms)

0B06 2V2

0B07 2V2Char

0B08 2tV2

0B09 2V2(tms)

0B0A V2 Cl Bl

Page 205: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 11 of 14

0C00 LOGIC F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0C01 LOG Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0C02 tAUX1

0C03 tAUX2

0C04 tAUX3

0C05 tTRIP

0C06 tCLOSE

0C07 CB Ops>

0C0F Display

Page 206: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 12 of 14

0D00 INPUT MASKS F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0D01 Blk 1tVo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D02 Blk 2tVo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D03 Blk 3tVo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D04 Blk 1tV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D05 Blk 2tV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D06 Blk 3tV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D07 Blk 4tV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D08 Blk 1tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D09 Blk 2tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D0A Blk 3tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D0B Blk 4tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D0C Blk 1tV2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D0D Blk 2tV2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D0E L Trip 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D0F L Close 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D10 Ext Trip 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D11 Aux 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D12 Aux 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D13 Aux 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D14 Set Grp 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D15 CB Closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D16 CB Open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0D17 Bus2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Page 207: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 13 of 14

0E00 RELAY MASKS F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0E01 1tVo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E02 2tVo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E03 3tVo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E04 1tVa(-b) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E05 1tVb(-c) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E06 1tVc(-a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E07 2tVa(-b) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E08 2tVb(-c) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E09 2tVc(-a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E0A 3tVa(-b) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E0B 3tVb(-c) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E0C 3tVc(-a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E0D 4tVa(-b) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E0E 4tVb(-c) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E0F 4tVc(-a) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E10 1tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E11 2tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E12 3tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E13 4tF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E14 1tV2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E15 2tV2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E16 CB Trip 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E17 CB Close 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E18 Aux1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E19 Aux2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E1A Aux3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E1B Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E1C Level 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E1D Level 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0E1E CB Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Page 208: AREVA KVFG R8559C

COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 3

Page 14 of 14

0F00 RECORDER F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0F01 Control

0F02 Capture

0F03 Post Trigger

0F04 Logic Trig

0F05 Relay Trig

Page 209: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Types KVFG 122, 142Voltage and Frequency Relays

Service Manual

Appendix 4

Page 210: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 211: AREVA KVFG R8559C

Figure 1. Underfrequency instantaneous operating times 1

Figure 2. Overfrequency instantaneous operating times 2

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 4

Contents

Page 212: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 213: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 4

Page 1 of 2

Figu

re 1

.U

nder

frequ

ency

insta

ntan

eous

ope

ratin

g tim

es (F

s =

58H

z)

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

5857

5655

5453

5251

5049

4847

46

Unde

r fre

quen

cy in

stanta

neou

s ope

ratin

g tim

es (F

s = 5

8Hz)

Appli

ed fr

eque

ncy (

Hz)

Operating time (ms)

Max

imum

Mini

mum

Page 214: AREVA KVFG R8559C

SERVICE MANUAL R8559BKVFG 122, 142 Appendix 4

Page 2 of 2

Figu

re 2

.O

verfr

eque

ncy

insta

ntan

eous

ope

ratin

g tim

es (F

s =

52H

z)

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

5253

5455

5657

5859

6162

6364

65

Ove

r fre

quen

cy in

stanta

neou

s ope

ratin

g tim

es (F

s = 5

8Hz)

Appli

ed fr

eque

ncy (

Hz)

Operating time (ms)

Max

imum

Mini

mum

60

Page 215: AREVA KVFG R8559C
Page 216: AREVA KVFG R8559C

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Pu

blic

atio

n:

R8

55

9C